Home

FP2/FP2SH User`s Manual - Panasonic Electric Works

1. Cable no 1 side Cable no 1 side Flat Cable Connector Rem art mumber Set of flat cable connector AFP2802 Flat cable connector with strain relief pitch of 1 27mm 2 pieces Suitable Wires er wire a 1 27mm 7pcs dia 0 127 Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 5 Wiring the Terminal Block Type I O Units 4 5 Wiring the Terminal Block Type I O Units 4 5 1 Wiring the Terminal Block Type Units Suitable Wires AWG22 to AWG14 0 3mm to 2 0mm 0 5 to 0 6N m Pressure Connection Terminals M3 5 terminal screws are used for the terminals The following pressure connection ter minals are recommended for the wiring to the terminals Fork type terminal Round type terminal 6mm or less 6mm or less 3 2mm or more 3 2mm or more Example of suitable pressure connection terminal JST Mfg Co Ltd Round type 1 25 MS3 0 25 to 1 65mm2 Fork type 1 25 B3A Round type 2 MS3 1 04 to 2 63mm2 Fork type 2 N3A Wiring to Terminal Block Remove the terminal block before beginning the wiring operations To remove the termi nal block push downward on the release lever located at the top of the terminal block Terminal block FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring Note 4 5 Wiring the Terminal Block Type I O Units Install the terminal block by inse
2. Slot No B gt 2 3 4 5 6 15 z gt i e dap y ee fas AA ia gt A 20 Y30 Y40 50 60 150 to to to to to to 2F Y3F Y4F 5F 6F 15F 16 points are assigned to free modules free slots L YN Y160 Y170 Y180 Y190 Y200 Y210 X220 260 to to to to to to to to YI6F Y17F Y18F Y19F Y20F Y21F X25F 26F 16 point type 64 point Free relay output unit type DC slot input unit I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 6 I O Numbers of Free Slots Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 1 Installation 4 1 Installation 4 1 1 Installation Space and Environment E DIN rail DIN EN50022 width 35 1 378 al unit mm in Dimensions 100 3 937 15 3 0 602 93 3 661 Type of FP2 backplane Type of FP2 backplane H type L mm in 5 module type 140 5 512 12 module type 11 module type Basic backplane 349 13 740 10 module type Expansion backplane The 5 module type backplane has no connector for expansion Installation to a DIN rail is possible Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 1 Installation Installation location Be sure to maintain
3. ae ae e T vrg aa 6 1 1 i i 8 8 i i O l l l 8 i i i i l l l i i i i i i i i i Q i i 3 o a Bet ns Cs an cont a OP a Oe ia XO X10 20 Y30 Y40 50 60 150 to to to to to to to to XF XF oF Y3F Y4F SF 6F 15F 16 points are assigned to free modules free slots Y160 Y170 Y180 Y190 Y200 Y210 X220 260 to to to to to to to t Yi6F Y17F Y18F Y19F Y20F Y21F X25F 26F o Free type DC slot input unit FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 6 I O Numbers of Free Slots 3 6 2 3 When Automatic Allocation is Used When automatic allocation is executed 16 points are uniformly assigned to each free slot With automatic allocation the contents of allocation are not registered Assignments are performed each time the power of PLC is turned on based on the units actually mounted Advantage Automatic allocation is convenient when frequent structural changes are conducted such as during trial runs and testing of the program It is convenient when using a large number of standard I O units units that occupy 16 points 16 points are assigned to free modules free slots 16 point type 16 point type Slots that do not CPU DC input unit transistor output unit actually exist backplane eae eee eee
4. Power CPU 16 point type 16 point type tran supply unit DC input unit sistor output unit 2 modules 5 modules I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation Registering with programming tool software Preparations Display the allocation screen 1 Set the FPWIN GR software to OFFLINE mode 2 On the Option menu select Allocate I O Map Creating allocations 1 In No of Slots enter the number of modules number of slots to used OE is assigned to the slots after they are specified In this case the number of modules that can be used is 5 so enter 5 wo wi W ppreennn ea wo 2 Assign input X or output Y according to the I O units to be installed in each slot Assign 16X to slots 0 and 1 and 16Y to slots 2 through 4 Atera Ls lie iiie OOOO O Wa afio C FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation When a system is configured with the FP2 backplane H type AFP25 H the display is shown as AFP25 since no exclusive tool display is not available for the H type The actual system is as shown below No indication of the power supply unit and expansion unit Registering contents of allocation Write the contents of allocation to the System register of the CPU 1 On the Online menu select Online Edit Mode 2 On the File menu select Download to PLC
5. Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 8 Input and Output Units 2 8 Input and Output Units 2 8 1 Common Specifications of Input and Output Units Parts Terminology and Functions 4 Input and output indicators Indicate the input and output on off states 2 Terminal block release lever By lowering this lever the terminal block can be removed from the unit without removing any of the wiring After installation push in the lock button at the bottom of the unit to lock in the terminal block 3 Terminal block This is the terminal block for the inputs outputs and power supplies This terminal block uses M3 sized crimping pressure connection terminals For more information regarding the crimping pressure connection terminals refer to section 4 5 1 4 Unit installation screw Secures the unit to the backplane 5 Connector This is the connector for input output and power supply wiring This allows the connector of discrete wire and the connector of flat cable For more information regarding the suitable connectors refer to section 4 4 1 For terminal connection an exclusive cable is available For more information refer to section 4 4 3 6 Indicator selection switch Switches between the first 32 points CN1 position and second 32 points CN2 position of the LED display for the 64 point type unit 2 30 FP2 FP2SH Parts
6. D2 with the data specified by D3 exchange Control instruction F19 Auxiliary jump SJP The program jumps to the label S ed S instruction specified by S and continues from there Binary arithmetic instructions 16 bit data S D a Po aons Pe ee a E F21 32 bit data D D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D B a1 adamon PBe O Ele le fg e efell addition P S2 D m ee a E OE addition PD S2 D Biss O O subtraction eaibtaction j em eae e zo re BOO P27 subtraction S2 D 7 j P28 subtraction S2 D muitipication S2 D matipestion PD S1 1 1 X S2 1 S2 gt D 3 D 2 multiplication S2 D a au division aa S2 D D ae DT9015 32 bit data D division PD o 1 S2 1 S2 gt quotient D 1 16 bit data multiplication oy S2 D Boo lean Description H A E VEL EY N DT9016 DT9015 S1 X S2 D z result in 16 bits re a increment P 1 32 bit data D 1 F37 16 bit data P37 omen Pa F38 32 bit data a D 1 D D 1 D 1 D 1 D D 1 D D 1 D 1 gt D 1 D S1 1 S1 x S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D 32 bit data multiplication D result in 32 bits Q Available Not available Not available partially 11 63 FP2SH FP10SH ee O d Description lean peran p BCD arithmetic instructions EE ra Os OO data addition PB Pan atwadation pos fo r olofolalealo data addition PDB re ieee e ere balalala data addition PB so peue e
7. Power supply sequence In order to protect the power supply sequence make sure to turn off the PLC before the input output power supply If the input output power supply is turned off before the PLC or if the PLC is not shut off momentarily the controller detects change of input level and might conduct an unexpected operation Before Turning On the Power Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 When turning on the power for the first time be sure to take the precautions given below When performing installation check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring particularly conductive fragments adhering to the unit Verify that the power supply wiring I O wiring and power supply voltage are all correct Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws Set the mode selector to PROG mode Before Entering a Program Chapter 5 Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program When using FPWIN GR software Procedure 1 Execute FPWIN GR 2 ON the Online menu select Online Edit Mode 3 ON the Edit menu select Clear Program Battery Do not install the battery when it is not used There is a possibility of leak if the battery remains discharged viii FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures Special Precautions With the FP2 The FP2 uses the term module when express the size of the unit or backplane The unit installation sizes come in two sizes t
8. FP2SH FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Internal SRAM RAM ROM transmission Se E Internal FROM Program Autoexec spg IC memory card ICN Note This method can only be used with an SRAM type IC memory card FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Chapter 7 IC Memory Card IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 1 Using the IC Memory Card 7 1 Using the IC Memory Card 7 1 1 Types of IC Memory Cards There are two types of IC memory cards an SRAM type and an FROM type The user can select the appropriate type for the application at hand Menton capac FROM type 2MB AIC50020 FROM type No battery backup is required so this type is ideal for saving programs Programs are written using the Copy File to IC Card function in the FPWIN GR When used as an expansion memory this type is a read only card The Data Editor is used to write data SRAM type This is ideal for use in expanding the data memory area When used as an expansion memory the F13 ICWT instruction and F12 ICRD instruction of the sequence pro gram are used to write and read data automatically About AFP2209 An interchangeable lithium battery is used When you use for the first time install the battery included The battery voltage of IC card is detected only once when the CPU unit is powered on An err
9. With F14 PGRD instruction specify a saved file name by the FPWIN GR to call up the program of from IC memory card j F14 PGRD DT 100 i STEP1 For the program above the contents STEP 1 stored in DT100 is the file name used to call up the program To store the program name to registers such as DT100 you can write it with alphanumeric code using FO MV or F1 DMV instruction or you can write it with ASCII conversion using F95 ASC instruction For more details refer to the programming manual es Notes There are dangers involved when switching programs while in the RUN mode Carefully read the section regarding the F14 PGRD instruction in the programming manual e Only files saved with the spg extension are programs that can be read using the F14 PGRD instruction IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 4 For Use as Expansion Memory 7 4 For Use as Expansion Memory Outline of Expansion Memory The expansion memory area is an independent area from the internal memory of the CPU that stores word data Use the F12 ICRD and F13 ICWT instructions to read and write data to this area Below are some of the things that you can do by using the expansion memory area 1 As reading and writing are easily done using high level instructions you can use the expansion memory as external memory for the CPU Writing for SRAM type Use the F13 ICWT instruction to transfer the word data stored in t
10. 100 50 Max load current mA 4 75 10 2 26 4 Power supply for driving internal circuit V FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Input a er cl AA O O Cc Output indicator l LED 9 1kQ AA 5 to 24V DC 5 to 24V DC pery The COM pins of each connector are Although and terminals are connected internally connected internally with the same connector It is recommended that they also be connected externally Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications 2 11 2 32 point Type DC Input 32 point Type Transistor PNP Output Unit Specifications mem o ooo eso O Min on voltage 19 2V 4mA Min on current Max off voltage 5 0V 1 5mA Max off current Response time Common method Input points 32 points common per common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Output specifica 0 1A at 12 to 24V DC 50mA at 5V DC Note 1 5V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time 0 driving internal Common method Output points 32 points common per common Common specifi Internal current consumption at 150mA or less cations 5V DC Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External Connection method Connector tw
11. 4 Insert the battery holder with the battery all the way seated in the IC memory card The lock swich is automatically back to the LOCK posi tion when removing the battery holder In this state insert the battery holder all the way seated Confirm the lock switch is in the LOCK position 5 Write the backup data in the IC memory card FP2 FP2SH Maintenance 9 1 Replacement of Spare Parts 9 1 2 Removable Terminal Block for Input and Output Units Removable Terminal Block The removable terminal block is used on the terminal block type input and output units The removable terminal block can be removed while it is still wired Therefore if a mal function or other error occurs replacement of the unit and other maintenance procedures can be carried out speedily Replacement of Removable Terminal Block Removal procedure The whole removable terminal block for terminal block type input and output units can be removed by lowering the OPEN knob release lever on the top of the terminal block Used at the time of wiring Installation procedure To replace the terminal block press it into its original position until it is completely seated and press the terminal block lock button on the bottom of the unit to secure the terminal block in place Then verify that the terminal block is properly secured and cannot be re moved Maintenance FP2 FP2SH 9 2 Preventive Mainten
12. Note 4 Number of subroutine 100 subroutines 1 program periodical interrupt allows setting of the time interval within the range from 0 5ms to 1 5s me Ui T Decimal constants f f 1 175494 x 10 98 to f 3 402823 x 1038 monorefined real _38 38 ten f1 175494 x 10 38 to 3 402823 x 10 es Notes 1 There are two unit types the hold type that saves the condi tions that exist just before turning the power off or changing from the RUN mode to PROG mode and the non hold type that resets them The selection of hold type and non hold type can be changed by the setting of system register 2 The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5 The numbers given in the table are numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting 3 The size of the file register varies depending on the settings of system registers 0 1 and 2 4 Hold or non hold type can be set using the system registers 10 12 FP2 FP2SH Specifications 10 3 Cable Adapter Specifications 10 3 Cable Adapter Specifications 10 3 1 AFC8503 AFC8503S 3000 3 24 99 0 15 Mini DIN5 pin Male D SUB9 pin Female PLC side gt 2 PC side Signal namel Pin No Signal name 3 z 5 See 4 5 SG ARA el Bafa BG an RD 3 3 pe leek eles 5 8
13. S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example H1234 H 32 31 34 33 21 4 3 Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D Example H 34 33 32 31 H3412 432 1 Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 bytes F74 P74 ASCII code 4 digit BCD data ABCD PABCD 1 S2 D BINA PBINA F75 P75 16 bit binary data gt ASCII code S1 S2 D N 001 Q Available Not available Not available partially 11 65 Boolean Description rand FPO FP e FPX FP2SH FP10SH F76 P76 ASCII code gt 16 bit binary data ABIN PABIN Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in D 1 S2 D 001 Converts the 32 bits of binary data S1 1 S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 bytes Converts the ASCII code specified by D S1 and S2 to 32 bits of binary data 11 and stores it in D 1 D l BCD S D Converts the 16 bits of binary data PBCD specified by S to four digits of BCD slo 3 F77 32 bit binary data gt ASCII code DBIA PDBIA 1 S2 F78 ASCII code gt DABI P78 32 bit binary PDABI data 1 S2 J O D 16 bit binary data gt 4 digit BCD data data and stores it in D Example K100
14. Using the Card to Save Programs Sequence programs can be written to IC memory cards and saved on them The IC memory card with the program written to it is then used as a program memory If the FPWIN GR or a similar tool is used to change the file name to Autoexec spg as an auto run file and the file is copied or the program is transferred and if the DIP switches on the CPU are set so that SW2 and SW4 are both on the program can be automatically transferred to the RAM at the same time that the power supply is turned on lf the F14 PRGRD instruction is executed in the RUN mode a program can be substi tuted for another program in any desired file lf an SRAM type of IC memory card is being used the ROM amp RAM service in the FPWIN GR can be used to copy the contents of the RAM in the CPU to the IC memory card If the card is being used as a program memory there are four ways to read programs from the card described below Programs can be automatically read when the power supply is turned on Programs can be read using the ROM amp RAM service menu on the FPWIN GR Programs can be read using the Upload Program from IC Card menu on the FPWIN GR The F14 PRGRD instruction of the sequence program can be used to read programs FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 1 Using the IC Memory Card Using the Card to Expand the Data Memory Area Data written to data registers and other destinations is writt
15. hour minute Real Time Clock Clock Calendar DT9054 DT90054 monitor and setting minute second DT9053 Real Time Clock Clock Calendar DT9055 DT90055 monitor and setting day hour Real Time Clock Clock Calendar DT9056 DT90056 monitor and setting year month Real Time Clock Clock Calendar DT9057 DT90057 monitor and setting day of the week 11 34 Descriptions Hour and minute data of the Real Time Clock Clock Calendar are stored here This data is read only data It cannot be overwritten Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits _ a Minute data HOO to H59 BCD Hour data HOO to H23 BCD The year month day hour minute second and day of the week data for the calendar timer is stored The built in Real Time Clock Clock Calendar will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years The Real Time Clock Clock Calendar can be set the time set by writing a value using a programming tool software or a program that uses the FO MV transfer instruction Higher amp bits DT9054 Minute data Second data DT90054 00 to H59 BCD HOO to H59 BCD DT9055 Hour data DT90055 HO1 to H31 BCD HOO to H23 BCD DT9056 Year data Month data DT90056 HOO to H99 BCD H01 to H12 BCD Lower 8 bits DT9057 Day of the week data DT90057 HOO to H G BCD FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address FP2 FP3 FP2SH FP10SH Read Descri
16. 0 Normal scan setting 11 12 vom TM OSH Add Default Descriptions ress value Operation settings when connection time error occurs in the remote Stop continuation slave station Available PLC FP2SH Enabled CPU starts operation after all the salve stations are Enabled recognized wait for Disabled CPU starts operation connec without waiting for slave tion station connections Only effective when registering remote I O allocation Operation mode setting when the MEWNET F system is used control I O data updating mode settings for MEWNET F system ae syn Scan mode ae scan mode Size of link i ae 0 to 64 words nication Size of link data bec 0 to 128 words commu nication Send area PC link 0 startin settings for cadres of es MEWNET link rela W P link Size of link system relays used GtoRawords for send area Send area starting address of 0 to 127 link data ister Size of link data registers O to 127 words used for send area Normal allocation PC link O for the link unit with a ie slot number and PC link 1 for one with a larger slot number setting PC link 0 and 1 allocation setting for MEWNET W P_ Normal Reverse allocation PC link 1 for the link unit with a smaller slot number and PC link 0 for one with a larger slot number link system allocation Note Note Available PLC MEWNET W FP10SH FP2 FP2SH MEWNET P FP10SH
17. C F The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit Adjust the load current referring to the following range 100 Max load current mA 4 75 10 2 26 4 Power supply for driving internal circuit V FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Input 7 Input indicator LED AA O O c Output indicator l LED 9 1kQ AA 5 to 24V DC Pin Layout Input XO to X1F Output Y20 to YSF Pin layout of first 32 points Pin layout of last 32 points Left side connector Right side connector A 3 a 5 to 24V DC The COM pins of each connector are Although and terminals are connected internally connected internally with the same connector It is recommended that they also be connected externally Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications 2 11 4 32 point Type DC Input with On Pulse Catch Input Function 32 point Type Transistor Output PNP Unit Specifications mem ooo eso O Min on voltage 19 2V 4mA Min on current Max off voltage 5 0V 1 5mA Max off current Response time 0 2ms or less for XO to X1F on off 0 3ms or less for XO to X1B 1 0 to 5 0ms for X1C to X1F Common method Input points 32 points common per common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be conne
18. DT9010 DT9011 Auxiliary register for operation DT9014 DT9015 Auxiliary register for operation DT9016 Operation error address hold DT9017 h oe O Read Descriptions ing When an error condition is detected in an intelligent unit the bit corresponding to the slot of the unit will be set to on Monitor using binary display 1 abnormal intelligent unit 0 normal intelligent unit Bit position J15 211 8 7 afa SlotNo hi5 2111 ss 8 7 4j3 prosor Tt TT ET TT tT Bit position 15 12j11 8 7_ 4 3 31 28 27 24 23 20 19 orooro S When the state of installation of an I O unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to the slot of the unit will be set to on Monitor using binary display 1 error 0 normal Bit position 15 2111 8 7 4 3 slot No 15 21 11 amp 5 Ta 43 PTT ET ETE et ty Bit position 15 121 8i7 4 3 Slot No 31 28 27 24 23 20 19 A orooro TT TTT TTT TT TT One shift out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit positions 0 to 3 when F105 BSR P105 PBSR or f106 BSL P106 PBSL instruction is executed The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in DT9015 DT90015 when F32 P32 P or F52 B P52 PB instruction is executed The divided remainder 32 bit is stored in DT9015 and DT9016 DT90015 and DT90016 when F33 D P33 PD or F53 DB P53 PDB
19. Panasonic PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FP2 FP2SH User s Manual ARCT1F320E 12 2012 9 panasonic net id pidsx global Safety Precautions Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents To ensure that you use this product correctly read this User s Manual thoroughly before use Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger WARNING If critical situations that could lead to user s death or serious injury is assumed by mishandling of the product Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system so that the whole system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas It could lead to an explosion Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium battery or other electronic parts Battery may explode if mistreated Do not recharge disassemble or dispose of fire CAUTION If critical situations that could lead to user s injury or only property damage is assumed by mishandling of the product To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation use this product at the values less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these specifications Do not dismantle or remodel the product It could cause excess
20. S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S 1 S2 1 S2 32 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact f amp 81 825 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the data comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 compare AND lt gt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S14 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 gt S24 1 S2 AND gt Connects a Form A normally open contact fp 5152 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the G8 01 0 0 0 0 comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 AND gt Connects a Form A normally open contact p gt 51 82 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the L L comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ANDe Connects a Form A normally open contact Os 51 52 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S14 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 AND lt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S24 1 S2 39 bit hall Connects a Form A normally open contact in poe 5 5 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the data comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 compare ORD lt gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in OR parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative conditio
21. S3 S2 1 S2 D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 0 D 1 D rane Zone control Prone S S2 When S8 lt 0 S3 S1 D i When S350 Sans When S3 gt 0 S3 S2 D Lael Zone control hess S1 S2 When S3 1 S3 lt 0 S3 1 P290 32 bit data PDZONE S3 D S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 0 0 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 gt 0 S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D BCD type real number operation instructions AA P300 operation PBSIN BCD type BCOS S D COS S1 1 S1 D 1 D om eo pai operation BCD type BTAN S D TAN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D mir mo Bo operation BCD type BASIN S D SIN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D Ree p pore o operation F304 BCD type BACOS S D COS S1 1 1 gt D 1 D le r gge operation Pans a BCD type bel e TAN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D OBE arctangent PBATAN peration Floating point type real number operation instructions F309 Floating point FMV S 1 S gt D 1 D move F310 Floating point F S1 S2 S1 1 S1 82 1 S2 gt D 1 D l P310 type data PF D 14 i addition F311 Floating point S2 S141 1 S24 1 S2 gt D 1 D P311 type data subtraction roe Floating point S1 1 S1 x S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D mel type data PF multiplication Floating point S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D RE P313 type data PF division QO Available gt lt Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is only available for
22. Specifications Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 2 FP2 FP2SH Specifications 10 1 Specifications 10 1 Specifications General Specifications Item Descriptions o 30 to 85 RH at 25 C non condensing 30 to 85 RH at 25 C non condensing Breakdown voltage 1 500V AC 1 minute between AC external terminal and frame ground terminal 500V AC 1 minute between DC external terminal and frame ground terminal Insulation resistance 100MQ or more measured with a 500V DC megger testing between external terminal and frame ground terminal Vibration resistance 10 to 55Hz 1 cycle min double amplitude of 0 75mm 0 030 in 10 min on 3 axes Shock resistance 98m s2 4 times on 3 axes 1 500 Vp p with pulse widths 50ns and 1us based on in house measurements Operating conditions Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust Dimensions DIN rail mounting groove 0 _ Sess DIN EN50022 width 35 1 378 l z ey om k HEH HEHE HeH O o9 S9 So 100 3 937 15 3 0 602 93 3 661 unit mm in FP2 backplane Description Number of module 5 modules 7 modules 9 modules 12 modules 14 modules L mmiin 405 512 FP2 backplane H type Description Number of module Basic backplane Expansion backplane 11 modules 10 modules L mm in 349 13 740 349 13 740 The illustration above shows the 7 module type The 5 module type does not have an expansion
23. Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges 100mm or more About static electricity e Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from causing damage e Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit e Use a power supply wire that is thicker than 2 mm AWG14 and twist it e The unit has sufficient noise immunity against the noise generated on the power line However it is recommended to take measures for reducing noise such as using a isolating transformer before supplying the power e Allocate an independent wiring for each power supplying line input output device and operating device If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse e Use the same power supply system for the CPU backplane and expansion backplane so that they are turned on and off simultaneously vii Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH
24. The program is transferred to the PLC programmable controller and the contents of allocation are simultaneously written to the PLC as part of its system register settings I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation 3 2 3 Allocation Example of Expansion Backplane 3 2 3 1 When Using FP2 Backplane CPU backplane a 16 point type 16 point type Backplane 7 module type DC input unit transistor output unit Power supply unit 1 module e eee E CPU 1 module SP Eee I O units gg ADS os os 16 point type DC input unit 2 units is 16 point type transistor output unit 3 units aod Expansion backplane O p e e e a a Backplane 9 module type I ii i ow Power supply unit 1 module I O units 16 point type relay output unit 6 units 64 point type DC input unit 1 unit ll 16 point type 64 point relay output unit type DC input unit 3 10 FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation 3 2 3 2 When Using FP2 Backplane H Type Backup battery expansion memory CPU unit Power supply unit I O unit Basic backplane Basic backplane Power supply unit 1 module I O units 16 point type input
25. Tool Option Window Help PLE Configuration Allocate IO Map Allocate Remote IO Map al lo a Communication Settings FPWINLGR Configuration Keyboard Customize The PLC Configuration window is opened 6 14 FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 4 6 5 FP2SH Operation Open the Initial Switch tab Delete the check from the Alarm battery error check box PLO Configuration Untitiel Click on OK to close the window The data is downloaded to the PLC x 6 15 FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 5 FP2SH Operation 6 5 3 Comment Function The FP2SH is equipped with a function that allows program comments I O comments block comments remarks to be stored Comment The Download to PLC function in the FPWIN GR can be used to write programs and comments Check to make sure that a check mark has been placed by Program and Comment under Program Access Mode on the FPWIN_GR Configuration menu of the FPWIN GR The Download to PLC function in the FPWIN GR can be used to automatically store programs in the FPWIN GR to the internal RAM and to automatically store comments to the comment memory F EE Sr ou Svs oe oo om EA NER Selecting the Upload from PLC function lets you load programs in the internal RAM and data in the comment memory into the FPWIN GR 6 16 FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH
26. Twelfth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Thirteenth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Fourteenth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Descriptions The error alarm relay number which went on is stored To reset the specified error alarm relay use an RST instruction only Relay number E12 to reset X1 E12 or lt r 11 51 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Descriptions FP10SH Fifteenth alarm relay which went on Nee Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Sixteenth error alarm relay which went on eee Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Seventeenth The error alarm relay number which went error alarm on is stored To reset the specified error relay which alarm relay use an RST instruction only DT90417 went on Available Relay number PLC FP2SH E12 to reset FP10SH Eighteenth a e k error alarm ua i relay which DT90418 went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Nineteenth error alarm relay which DT90419 went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH 11 52 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available FP10SH DT90420 DT90421 DT90422 Time at which the first error alarm relay DT90401 went on for minute and second data Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Time at which the first error alarm relay DT90401 went on for day and hour data Availab
27. gt H100 F81 4 digit BCD BIN S D Converts the four digits of BCD data P81 data 16 bit PBIN specified by S to 16 bits of binary data binary data and stores it in D Example H100 K100 F82 32 bit binary DBCD S D Converts the 32 bits of binary data P82 data gt 8 digit PDBCD specified by S 1 S to eight digits of BCD data BCD data and stores it in D 1 D F83 8 digit BCD DBIN S D Converts the eight digits of BCD data P83 data 32 bit PDBIN specified by S 1 S to 32 bits of binary 7 binary data data and stores it in D 1 D F84 16 bit data INV Inverts each bit of data of D P84 invert com PINV plement of 1 F85 16 bit data P85 complement of 2 F86 32 bit data P86 complement of 2 F87 16 bit data ABS P87 absolute PABS F88 32 bit data DABS P88 absolute PDABS F89 16 bit data EXT P89 sign extension PEXT F90 Decode DECO P90 PDECO 7 segment SEGT decode PSEGT ENCO S n D Encodes part of the data of S and PENCO stores it in D The part is specified by 7 0 0 0 0 60 6 n 16 bit data UNIT S n D The least significant digit of each of the combine PUNIT n words of data beginning at S are 7 O Q stored united in order in D Q Available X Not available Not available partially Inverts each bit of data of D and adds 1 inverts the sign Inverts each bit of data of D 1 D and adds 1 inverts the sign Gives the absolute value of the
28. 11 13 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH tem Add Default Descriptions ress value 0 All data in a scan 1 to 65535 Setting processing capacity per scan can be obtained using the formula Capacity Set value x 256 bytes Size of link relays used for commu 0 to 64 words nication Size of link data registers used for O to 128 words commu nication Send area PC link 1 starting settings for address of os 64 to 127 MEWNET link relay Processing capacity setting for PC link of i 024 MEWNET H link system bytes per Available PLC FP10SH scan MEWNET H setting PC link 1 Send area startin e of 128 PATS link data register Size of link data registers 0 to 127 words used for send area Unit number setting for tool port Available PLC FP2 FP2SH 1 to 99 unit No 1 to 99 Tool port nication format Character bits 7 bits 8bits setting Communication format Modem communication character bit 8 bits Modem communi cation Disabled Note Available PLC MEWNET W FP10SH FP2 FP2SH MEWNET P FP10SH Enabled Disabled When connecting a modem set the unit number to 1 with system register 410 setting for tool port Available PLC FP2 FP2SH setting W P link Size of link system relays used Note for send SoeF worde area 11 14 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH tem fess O Neme ayes Deserts ress value In the FP10SH when the dip switch SW1 on the CPU is off the baud rate setti
29. At the expansion backplane I O numbers are allocated continuing from the last number allocated to slots that do not actually exist on the CPU backplane 3 4 1 2 Procedure for Automatic Allocation Automatic allocation is executed when the power is turned on If I O allocations have previously been registered using arbitrary allocation or I O mount allocation automatic allocation is not executed Clear the registered allocations and then turn on the power once again section 3 5 The result of the automatic allocation will be the same as for I O mount allocation 3 16 FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 5 Procedure for Clearing Registered Content 3 5 Procedure for Clearing Registered Content 3 5 1 Meaning of Clearing Registered Content To repeat the I O allocation it is necessary to clear registered content Registered con tent is cleared by initializing the system registers ae Note System registers not related to I O allocations are also initialized If you only want to change the registered I O allocations do not initialize the system registers Instead use arbitrary allocation section 3 2 3 5 2 Clearing Content Using Programming Tool Software Preparations Set the FPWIN GR tool software to online monitor Procedure 1 On the Option menu select PLC Configuration be Ce ee ee ee Dals am r h H D bo hhi T ed et ee LE el d Hj Reto Era Tee iD brd T Ret Ge Pet era BD Bla
30. FG 4 6 9 Unit mm 10 3 2 AFC85305 AFC8531 AFC8532 For extending for the tool port ee ee Unit mm Unit mm 10 13 Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 3 Cable Adapter Specifications 10 14 Chapter 11 Appendix 11 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers Precaution for System Registers What is the system register area e System registers are used to set values parameters which determine operation ranges and functions used Set values based on the use and specifications of your program e There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used Type of system registers The registers to be used depend on each PLC 1 Allocation of user memory System registers 0 1 and 2 These registers set the size of the program area and file register area allowing the user memory area to be configured for the environment used The size of the memory area will vary depending on the type 2 Allocation of timers and counters System register 5 The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number 3 Hold non hold type setting System registers 6 to 18 When these registers are set to hold type the values in the relays and data memory will be retained even if the system is switched to PROG mode or the power is turned off If set to non hold type the values
31. FP2 BP MH 00 2 5 2 1 3 Expansion Backplane H Type FP2 BP EH 2 6 214 Expansi n Cavle tcc lt Ccse detec ced et sie ceceee eee eesices 2 7 22 NEPA arene duh mde od ane ee odie Acre eee ere acd rw eee are 2 8 2 2 1 Standard Type CPU FP2 C1 0 ees 2 8 2 2 2 CPU with 64 Points Input FP2 C1D 2 12 Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH 2 3 Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 CPU 2 15 24 Peo GPW terrre ce tate ce eee ee aes a E eee hy 2 18 2 4 1 32k 60k Step Standard Type CPU FP2 C2L FP2 C2 2 19 2 4 2 CPU with IC Memory Card Interface FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 2 20 2 5 Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 C2L FP2 C2 2 22 2 6 IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 0 0 ee 2 23 2 7 Power Supply Units 0 eee ene 2 28 2 7 1 Power Supply Specifications 0 0 0 cee eee 2 28 2 8 ARDULANG Output UniS soiarata cad earacucaven niere ah aed aoa eee ge aN ae ee 2 30 2 8 1 Common Specifications of Input and Output Units 2 30 29 iNpul Wnits Specifications orreri asne vetoed apne teased ins 2 33 2 9 1 16 point Type DC Input Unit 0 0 cee ees 2 33 2 9 2 32 point Type DC Input Unit 0 eee 2 35 2 9 3 64 point Type DC Input Unit 0 0088 2 37 2 10 Output Units Specifications nananana eaaa eeaeee 2 39 2 10 1 16 point Type Relay Output Uni
32. Flash Mem FARA SE Al alles it E_fp10s ig sample i E_fp10sh a Sample spg File name autoexec Files of type FPWIN GR NPST GR File fp spg Cancel FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 6 8 3 How the IC Memory Card is Operated Turn off the power supply and remove the CPU Have the IC memory card ready that contains programs already written to it Procedure 1 Set the DIP switches on the back of the CPU for IC memory card operation SW2 on SW4 on 2 Install the CPU back in its original position on the back plane If the power supply is switched on in the RUN mode the program on the IC memory card called Autoexec spg is sent to the internal RAM The program is transferred at the point when the power supply is turned on ig Note If the power supply is turned on with the Autoexec spg file on the IC memory card all contents of the RAM up to that point are lost FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 8 4 Transferring Data From the RAM to the IC Memory Card 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P The RAM ROM Transfer function in the FPWIN GR tool software is used to send programs and data in the CPU to an SRAM type IC memory card The data range can be specified as any of the following fields WL WR DT FL SV EV and LD DIP switch settings SW2 off SW4 on
33. MEWNET VE link unit MEWNET VE2 link unit Remote I O Slave Unit FNS Unit Transistor outputtype FP2 FNS eg FP FNS ae Expansion cable FP2 EC 180g FP2 EC2 400g FP2 Performance Specifications FP2 CPU FP2 C1 AFP2211 FP2 C1D AFP2212 FP2 C1SL AFP2214 Program control method Relay symbol cyclic operation Controllable Basic construction Using Backplanes Max 768 points 12 modules I O points Using Backplanes H type Max 512 points 8 modules Expanded construction Using Backplanes Max 1 600 points 25 modules Using Backplanes H type Max 2 048 points 82 modules Using remote I O system Max 2 048 points using S LINK or MEWNET F system Program Internal memory Approx 16k steps capacity Note 1 Using expansion memory Approx 32k steps Note 2 instruc tions High level instructions 428 types Operation Basic instructions From 0 35us per instruction speed T High level instructions From 0 93us per instruction Operation External input relays X 2 048 points Note 1 suis tor External output relays Y 2 048 points Note 1 relays Internal relays R 4 048 points Note 3 Timer counter T C Total 1 024 points Note 3 Timer units of 1ms 10ms 100ms and 1s counts up to 32 767 x each unit Counter 1 to 32 767 counts 0 to 14 333 words when expanding 0 to 30 717 words Note 3 Timer counter set value 1 024 words area SV Timer counter elapsed 1 024 words
34. and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 F273 Minimum value S1 Searches for the minimum value in P273 double word S2 D the double word data table between data 32 bit the area selected with S1 and S2 i and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F275 Total and S1 The total value and the mean value of P275 mean values S2 D the word data with sign from the area i word data 16 selected with S1 to S2 are bit obtained and stored in the D F276 Total and DMEAN S1 The total value and the mean value of P276 mean values PDMEAN S2 D the double word data with sign from i double word the area selected with S1 to S2 data 32 bit are obtained and stored in the D F277 Sort word SORT S1 The word data with sign from the P277 data 16 bit PSORT S2 area specified by S1 to S2 are S3 sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F278 Sort double DSORT S1 The double word data with sign from P278 word data 32 PDSORT S2 the area specified by S1 to S2 are bit S3 sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F282 Scaling of SCAL S1 The output value Y is found for the 16 bit data input value X by performing scaling e for t
35. in D 1 D ROFF PROFF ui 5 Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D DROFF PDROFF Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D 1 D point off to integer Floating point FINT S D The decimal part of the real number type data round PFINT data specified in S 1 S is rounded ding the first down and the result is stored in decimal point D 1 D down Floating point FRINT S D The decimal part of the real number type data round PFRINT data stored in S 1 S is rounded ding the first off and the result is stored in D 1 decimal point off D Floating point F S D The real number data stored in S 1 type data sign PF S is changed the sign and the changes result is stored in D 1 D S D FABS PFABS Takes the absolute value of real number data specified by S 1 S and the result absolute value is stored in D 1 D RAD S D The data in degrees of an angle PRAD specified in S 1 S is converted to radians real number data and the result is stored in D 1 D Floating point type data absolute F337 P337 Floating point type data degree
36. instruction is executed After commencing operation the address where the first operation error occurred is stored Monitor the address using decimal display FP2SH When the higher byte of DT90257 is H2 the error occurs in the 2nd program block In case of the 1st program block it is H1 N A FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Operation error DT9018 DT90018 address non hold pT9019 DT90019 gt MS ring counter Maximum value of program cas Available PLC FP3 Display of program capacity Available PLC FP10SH DT90020 Display of program capacity Available PLC FP2 Maximum value DT9021 of file register Note Available PLC FP3 Maximum value DT90021 of file register Note Available PLC FP2 FP10SH Note Used by the system Descriptions The address where an operation error occurred is stored Each time an error occurs the new address overwrites the previous address At the beginning of scan the addresses 0 Monitor the address using decimal display FP2SH When the higher byte of DT90257 is H2 the error occurs in the 2nd program block In case of the 1st program block it is H1 The data stored here is increased by one every 2 5 ms HO to HFFFF Difference between the values of the two points absolute value x 2 5 ms Elapsed time between the two points The last address of sequence program area set in system register 0
37. oja 54 mewe TTT OI LOO CT Bit position i5 _ 12 1 8 7 4 3 nojs2 2928 2524 21 20 owon 11 IIIT A r bit corresponding to the slave station number of the MEWNET F where an error is occurring will be set to on Monitor using binary display 1 Error slave station 0 Normal slave Bit position 15 _ 12111 8 7 4 3 Siavestationnoli 13 12 9 8 5 4 nme Tee Bit postion hs t21 817 43 Lo Slavestationno 32 29 28 _ 25 24 _ 21120 panes IL O OET i a E voltage drop at MEWNET F slave station set the bit corresponding to that slave station number will be set to on Monitor using binary display 1 Error slave station 0 Normal slave station Bit poston hs 2m ai aja N A 5 a 20 persons LLII LOI CO IL FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address FP2 Descriptions FP3 FP2SH p FP10SH Display the error conditions for 8 types of errors using 1 byte 1 Abnormal condition 0 Normal condition Communication error Transmission error Illegal unit error Error code Terminal station error of Slot number error MEWNET F I O mapping error remote Momentary voltage I O system drop error DT9136 DT90136 DT9137 DT90137 Abnormal O unit error Higher 8 bits Lower 6 bits oT9136 DT90136 a o ioo a O Moo N For master For master 1 Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits oT9137 0T90137 gE Ma CC a For master
38. 0 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s cycles et 01s PL L R901B 0 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 2 s cycles 02s f LJ R901C 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 1 s cycles 1s R901D 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 2 s cycles JUL ETE 1 min clock pulse f LJ Repeats on off operations in 1 min cycles Poe relay P P Mint R901F Notused _ Note Used by the system Auxiliary timer MAOO contact Repeats on off operations in 0 01 s cycles 11 19 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG R9020 RUN mode flag Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN Turns on while the initialize test switch of the CPU is set to ae Test RUN mode flag TEST and mode selector is set to RUN test run operation Note Start Turns off during the normal RUN mode eves Break flag Turns on while the BRK instruction is executing or the step Note run is executing R9023 Turns on while the BRK instruction is enabled in the test Note Break enable flag RUN mode R9024 Ouiput upeate enable Turns on while the output update is enabled in the test RUN flag in the test RUN Note iode mode R9025 Sinale instruction fla Turns on while the single instruction execution is selected in Note g g the test RUN mode R9026 Turns on while the F149 MSG P149 PMSG instruction is 3 Message flag Note execut
39. 11 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Default aoe Descriptions value f 0 to 52428 us Operation time setting for hac If the response of the connected communication 240 us programmable display is show please processing make the value bigger Time out time setting of system watching dog 100 ms 0 4 to 640 ms Multi frame communication time settings Inthe computer cco ms 10 to 81917 5 ms link and communication time setting for data sending buffer Tim f Time out time setting for setting for FP2SH FP10SH the F145 SEND P145 PSEND F146 RECV P146 PRECV F152 RMRD P152 PRMRD and F153 RMWT P153 PRMWT instructions Effective time setting for 163837 5 2500 to 163837 5 ms monitoring ms 0 to 640 ms Scans once each specified time interval Set 0 Normal scan Setting time can be obtained using the formula Set time Set value x 0 1 ms Multi frame COMmmenicaton ME 6500 ms_ 10 0 to 8190 0 ms settings in the computer Time out time setting for the F145 SEND P145 PSEND F146 RECV P146 PRECV F152 RMRD P152 2000 ms 10 0 to 8190 0 ms PRMRD and F153 RMWT P153 PRMWT instructions Program block editing time in the RUN mode 10000 us 800 0 to 52428 0 us 0 0 to 640 ms Normal scan 10000 ms 10 to 81917 5 ms Constant scan time setting setting for FP2 Constant scan time Scans once each specified time interval Set
40. 14 modules FP2 backplane H type Ores Basic backplane 11 modules Expansion backplane 10 modules Following two kinds of backplanes are available 1 FP2 backplane AFP25 2 FP2 backplane H type AFP25 H These two backplanes cannot be used in combination Carefully select the type of backplanes before you order Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 1 System Configuration Restriction on the number of modules of the backplane For master backplane The number of units that can be installed is determined by the number of modules of the backplane used the power supply unit to be installed and the CPU 1 module type CPU Standard type CPU 2 modules type CPU CPU with 64 point input CPU with S LINK 1 module type power supply unit 100V 2 5A 200V 2 5A 2 modules type power supply unit 100 to 240V 5A 24V DC 5A CPU backplane FP2 backplane Na 5 5 module type type 7 module type 7 module type 9 module type 9 module type 12 12 module type 12 module type 14 14 module type 14 module type CHi 1 module type CPU and 3 slots free 5 slots free 7S 10 slots free 1 module type iim To m i power supply Lam We OTT unit 2 modules type 9 slots free 6 slots free 9 slots free CPU and 1 module type i TA co Wc power supply Ul WIG Lelio io unit 1 module type CPU and 6 slots free 9 slots free 2 module type Pe T D doo power supply M M o unit 2 modules
41. 2 X0 X1 Y10 Frevious execution of DF instruction The derivative output is obtained without relation to condition of trigger X1 of the time of previous execution 11 17 11 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address R9000 R9001 R9002 R9003 R9004 R9005 R9006 R9007 R9008 R9009 R900A R900B I oe Self diagnostic error Turns on when a self diagnostic error occurs flag The self diagnostic error code is stored in DI90000 MEWNET TR master Turns on when a communication error occurs in the error flag MEWNET TR master unit or MEWNET TR network The Available PLC slot where the erroneous MEWNET TR master unit is FP10SH installed can be checked using DT90002 or DT90003 I O error flag Turns on when the error occurs in the I O unit The slot Available PLC FP2 number of the unit where the error was occurred is stored in FP2SH DT90002 DT90003 f Turns on when an error occurs in an intelligent unit The slot Intelligent unit error DR fla number where the erroneous intelligent unit is installed is g stored in DT90006 or DT90007 WOventiesiionertoi Turns on when an I O verification error occurs fla The slot number of the I O unit where the verification error g was occurred is stored in DT90010 or DT90011 PackUp patiary rror Turns on for an instant when a backup battery error occurs flag non hold Turns on and keep
42. 2 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a jump instruction has an index modifier the number of steps isthenumber in parentheses 3 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a loop instruction has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 11 56 FPO FP e Bee _ Oo i P ere eee eeeh Indicates the end of a main program pee Ome pee ere ner Lo ofo fale the trigger turns on a a E EC seplesseriamenone ee Step ladder instructions SSTP e The start of program n for process 3 olololololc diili control a ka ban ka al NSTL l Starts the specified process n and m ii clears the process currently started Scan execution type NSTP Starts the specified process n and H iem H clears the process currently started Pulse execution type Clear step CSTP Resets the specified process n effie Clear multi SCLR Resets multiple processes specified by 5 ple steps m PLR eH n1 and n2 Step end STPE End of step ladder area BODE 5 Subroutine instructions Subroutine CALL When the trigger is on Executes the call CALL al subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the subroutine The output in the subroutine is maintained Output off When the trigger is on Executes the akh type IFCAL n subroutine 4 subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the 5 lt x x x X call subroutine But the output in 2 the
43. 24V DC 0 1A output type points DC input with on pulse 32 input Connector 24V DC sink source input FR2 XY64D7P catch input function transis points tor PNP open collector 32 output 5 to 24V DC 0 1A output type points ee Notes The maximum load current value will differ depending on the operating voltage Refer to the specifications page for each unit For types with the on pulse catch input the four points X1C through X1F of the 32 input points possess the on pulse catch input function section 2 11 5 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 9 Input Units Specifications 2 9 Input Units Specifications 2 9 1 16 point Type DC Input Unit Specifications tem Description S Part number Input voltage range 10 2 to 26 4V DC Max input current 10mA or less Response time lt lt Common method Input points per common 8 points common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Operating indicator 16 dot LED display lit when on External connection method Terminal block M 3 screw Weight CY Aprox 1409 Internal Circuit Diagram LED Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 9 Input Units Specifications Pin Layout Input XO to XF 12 to 24V DC i2to24V a gt For more information regarding the applicable pressure connection crimp terminals and wiring refer to section 4 5 1 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Funct
44. 5A at 12 to 24V DC 0 1A at 5V DC Note Maximum surge current Off state leakage current On state maximum voltage drop Response time Internal current consumption 100mA or less at 5V DC Power supply for driving 4 75 to 26 4V DC Note internal circuit Current 120mA or less at 24V DC Surge absorber Fuseratings ooe common Operating indicator 16 dot LED display lit when on Terminal block M 3 screw Wim O ooo og gt Note The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit Adjust the load current referring to the following range an Co 100 Max load current mA 4 75 10 2 26 4 Power supply for driving internal circuit V Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Output indicator LED 7 5kKQ AA 5 to 24V DC Pin Layout Output YO to YF 5 to 24V DC For more information regarding the applicable pressure connection crimp terminals and wiring refer to section 4 5 1 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 4 16 point Type Transistor PNP Output Unit Specifications Part number Rated load voltage Load voltage rangs Maximum load current Maximum surge curren On state maximum voltage drop Response time Internal current consumption 80mA or less at 5V DC Power supply for driving 4 75 to 26 4V DC Note internal circuit Current 70mA
45. 6 8 FP2 FP2SH Record of changes Manual No ARCT1F320E ACG M320E ARCT1F320E 1 ACG M320E 1 ARCT1F320E 2 ACG M320E 2 ARCT1F320E 3 ACG M320E 3 ARCT1F320E 4 ACG M320E 4 ARCT1F320E 5 ACG M320E 5 ARCT1F320E 6 ACG M320E 6 ARCT1F320E 7 ACG M320E 7 ARCT1F320E 8 ACG M320E 8 ARCT1F320E 9 ACG M320E 9 ARCT1F320E 10 ACG M320E 10 ARCT1F320E 11 ACG M320E 11 ARCT1F320E 12 ACG M320E 12 Date Jul 2000 Jul 2003 May 2004 Feb 2005 Sep 2006 Mar 2007 Apr 2008 Oct 2008 Feb 2009 Mar 2009 Jan 2010 Apr 2011 Sep 2012 Record of changes Desceiption of changes First edition 2 edition 3 edition 4 edition 5 edition 6 edition 7 edition 8 edition 9 edition 10 edition 11 edition 12 edition 13 edition Record of changes FP2 FP2SH Please contact Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd E Overseas Sales Division Head Office 2431 1 Ushiyama cho Kasugai shi Aichi 486 0901 Japan E Telephone 81 568 33 7861 W Facsimile 81 568 33 8591 panasonic net id pidsx global About our sale network please visit our website Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd 2012 September 2012 PRINTED IN JAPAN ARCT1F320E 12
46. C3P Parts Terminology and Functions Q Status indicator LEDs page 2 9 display the operating condition and error statuses 2 IC memory card access LED Illuminates when data is being read from or written to the IC memory card 3 IC memory card slot is used when installing an optional IC memory card 4 IC memory card eject button Pressing this button ejects the IC memory card 5 Initialize test switch page 2 9 Setting the switch to the INITIAL side clears errors and initializes the operation memory Setting the switch to the TEST side puts the PLC in the test operation mode 6 Mode selector page 2 10 is used to change the operation mode of the PLC This is used to switch between the RUN REMOTE and PROG modes 7 IC memory card access enable switch Setting this switch to the on upward side enables data to be read and written to the IC memory card COM port RS232C page 2 11 is used to connect a computer or general serial devices 9 Tool port RS232C is used to connect a programming tool mw next page FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 4 FP2SH CPU Operation condition switches are used to set the baud rate of the programming tool to select the program memory and to select the writing operation for the program memory 4d Memory backup battery for backup of the internal memory RAM Part number AFC8801 CR2450 or equivalent Operation Co
47. FP2 C8P 2 20 CT 2 connector terminal 4 27 Current consumption 1 13 D Dimensions 4 3 10 3 DIN rail 4 7 Dust proofing label 4 8 4 22 Eliminating effects from noise 4 16 Emergency stop circuit 4 36 EPROM 6 8 6 10 Erasing 7 6 Erasing the IC memory card 7 11 ERROR LED 8 5 Expanded memory field 7 6 Expansion cable 1 7 2 7 4 11 Expansion memory 7 22 Expansion memory unit 2 15 2 22 Index FP2 FP2SH F Installation location 4 4 Interlock circuit 4 36 Formatting 7 6 DOES Internal circuit diagram 2 14 2 33 2 35 2 38 2 39 2 42 2 44 2 46 2 48 2 50 2 52 2 54 2 57 2 60 2 63 2 66 Formatting the IC memory card 7 8 FP2 CPU 2 8 FP2 operation 6 3 FP2 RAM operation 6 5 FP2 ROM operation 6 6 FP2SH CPU 2 18 FP2SH operation 6 13 FP2SH RAM operation 6 17 FP2SH ROM operation 6 19 Free slots 3 18 FROM 6 10 7 3 G General specifications 10 3 Grounding 4 17 4 36 H Hexadecimal 11 96 I O allocation methods 3 3 I O mixed unit 2 32 I O mixed units specifications 2 55 I O mount allocation 3 3 3 13 IC memory card 2 23 7 3 7 8 IC memory card operation 6 13 6 29 Initialize test switch 2 9 Input and output units 2 30 Input unit 2 31 Input units specifications 2 33 Input wiring 4 18 Installation 4 3 L Lifetime of back
48. FP2SH 2 9 Input Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Input TE ey en E AA O O T fam c Pin Layout Input XO to X1F Input X20 to X3F Pin layout of first 32 points Pin layout of last 32 points Left side connector CN1 Right side connector CN2 CN1 CN2 The COM pins of each connector are connected internally For more information regarding the applicable connectors and terminals refer to sec tion 4 4 1 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 1 16 point Type Relay Output Unit Specifications Part number FP2 Y16R Insulation method Optical coupler Rated control capacity 2A 250V AC 5A common 2A 30V DC 5A common Min load 100uA 100mvV resistor load Response time Electrical 100 000 operations ormore SSS Internal current consumption 120mA or less at 5V DC Power supply for driving Voltage 24V DC 10 21 6 to 26 4V DC internal circuit i60mA or less Surge absorber Common method Output points per 8 points common common Operating indicator 16 dot LED display lit when on External connection method Terminal block M 3 screw Approx 190g Internal Circuit Diagram 250V AC 2A tute GOV DC 2A Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Pin Layout Output YO to YF 30V DC 2A 1 i 24V DC For more information regardin
49. Number of step ladder Number of subroutine Number of interrupt program Comment input function Clock calendar function Link functions Self diagnostic functions Other functions Memory backup time lithium battery storage time Memory backup time for IC memory card at 25 C es Notes 10 1 Specifications FP2SH CPU FP2 C2L AFP2221 FP2 C2 AFP2231 FP2 C2P AFP2235 FP2 C3P AFP2255 Unlimited number of points Unlimited number of points down type timer 0 01 to 327 67s Max 887 points imer 0 67S 1 000 steps For FP2 C3P 1st program only 100 subroutines 25 program Available internal function Available year month day hour minute second and day of week Note 5 Inter PLC link computer link remote programming modem and data transfer Watchdog timer memory malfunction detection I O malfunction detection back up battery malfunction detection program syntax check etc ROM operation function Note 6 forced input output interrupt processing test run and constant scan CPU only Min 3 500 hours or more typical approx 31 000 hours When installing memory unit AFP2207 or Min 3 500 hours AFP2208 typical approx 31 000 hours AlIC52000 Rechargeable type 3 months or more After full charge AFP2209 Interchangeable type 1 The practical usable external input and output points are re stricted according to the number of the input and output units 2 Hold or non hold t
50. Operation The program block number for the latest error program operation error is stored here each time No non hold an operation error is detected is Available Program block number PLC FP2SH H1 In the first program block FP10SH H2 In the 2nd program block Break occurrence The program block number where the program BRK instruction occurred is stored here DT90259 number Program block number Available H1 In the first program block PLC FP2SH H2 In the 2nd program block FP10SH Type of IC memory card is monitored here as H5 Flash EEPROM type IC memory card aa ae d H6 SRAM type IC memory card IA pTeo26e l eee i H506 For FP10SH flash PLC FP2SH a a G mixed type IC memory FP1OSH H6 No archival information is stored H6 No data is written Other than above Erroneous condition self diagnostic error code E56 naa ae The capacity of IC memory card is stored DT90261 paar in units of KB If Flash EEPROM SRAM mixed type IC memory card is used dot ie ony SRAM capacity is stored Capacity of IC memory card 2 If Flash EEPROM SRAM mixed type IC DT90262 Available memory card is used flash EEPROM PLC FP2SH Capacity is stored in units of KB FP10SH File register bank current DT90263 value The current value of file register bank is stored here Available PLC FP2SH Note For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system
51. Output Connection of LED equipped Reed Switch With a LED is connected to an input contact such as LED equipped reed switch make sure that the voltage value applied to the input terminal of PLC is greater than on voltage value In particular take care when connecting a number of switches in series Input terminal LED equipped A voltage DC l reed switch AUE GEMOL input unit Power supply for input Connection of Two wire Type Sensor If the input of the PLC is not turned off because of leakage current from the two wire type sensor the connection of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Using 16 point type DC input unit FP2 X16D2 Off voltage 2 5V Input impedance 3kQ Input terminal DC input unit Two wire type sensor Bleeder resistor Internal circuit l Sensor s leakage current mA R Bleeder resistor kQ The off voltage of the input is 2 5V therefore select an R value so that the voltage between the COM terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2 5V The input impedance is 3kQ 7 5 The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is R S kQ2 3 x l 2 5 Power supply voltage R In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W The wattage W of the resistor is W 4 19 Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 3 Wiring Input and Output Connection of LED equipped Limit Switch With the LED equipped limit switch if the inpu
52. P145 D N the MOD bus master via COM port S1 S2 Receives the data from the slave station P146 N D as the MOD bus master via COM port S1 D N 3 S N D S D N S N D FPO0 FP e FPX S network MEWNET via link unit S2 Receives the data to another station in the network MEWNET via link unit S2 Sends the data to the slave station as S pg peer fee a the MOD bus master type II F146 Data receive RECV S2 Receives the data from the slave station prag oarece REOV F145 Data send Cca ee lan O p DEE port F146 Data receive RECV 1 S2 Receives the data from the slave station P146 as the MEWTOCOL master via COM port F147 S D Converts the ASCII code data in the area starting with S for printing and E R outputs it to the word external output relay WY specified by D F148 Self ERR n Stores the self diagnostic error number P148 diagnostic PERR n k100 n in DT9000 turns R9000 on and error set to K299 turns on the ERROR LED F149 Message S Displays the character constant of S in P149 display the connected programming tool Available Not available Not available partially S2 Sends the data to the slave station as the MEWTOCOL master via COM x Oo S x lc A 2 3 4 The instruction is available for FPO T32 V2 3 or later and FP e This instruction is available for FPO V1 20 or later and FP e This inst
53. PROG mode Turns on when unit No 4 is in the RUN mode R9073 Turns off when unit No 4 is in the PROG mode Turns on when unit No 5 is in the RUN mode R9074 Turns off when unit No 5 is in the PROG mode R9075 ae MEWNET W P No 7 Turns off when unit No 7 is in the PROG mode PC link operation mode relay for PC link 0 W P Unit Turns on when unit No 7 is in the RUN mode R9077 Turns on when unit No 8 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 8 is in the PROG mode R9078 Turns on when unit No 6 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 6 is in the PROG mode om hs Rie RR e Turns off when unit No 11 is in the PROG mode oo ta nai Seaman Turns off when unit No 12 is in the PROG mode re i maaan an ea Turns off when unit No 13 is in the PROG mode oo emit amen Turns off when unit No 14 is in the PROG mode Sa eraat ER Turns off when unit No 15 is in the PROG mode iS eagiomts EER e Turns off when unit No 16 is in the PROG mode Note When the system registers 46 KO PC link O for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 1 for one with a larger slot No When the system registers 46 K1 PC link 1 for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link O for one with a larger slot No R907E Turns on when unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 10 is in the PROG mode R907F Turns on when unit No 9 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 9 is in
54. Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units ls acne eu Write data area WD Writes data to a data area PREIS Monitors a registered contact or data using the M M E h f ifi ina 16 Preset contact area fill command SC ee eee D A poem eee point on and off pattern Wri h h f Preset data area fill command SD rites the same contents to the data area of a specified range Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register Write system register specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Switches the operation mode of the Remote control programmable controller aoon S Aborts communication Read contact area Write contact area 11 95 11 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD BCD data OIN O OAA WON O 11 96 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010
55. Wes ete mae Ha mT ji Dimi Sri r E pih mr a 10 35 Peat Biy Bed ti ar Segue bey BET 4 Dirina Teed Ger LL Commection Trema Sect ji Dairy Lat gid Deriry For more detail refer to the FPWIN GR software help Procedure Until Operation FP2 FP2SH 5 2 Programming with Programming Tool Software Chapter 6 FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 1 FP2 Operation 6 1 FP2 Operation 6 1 1 FP2 RAM and ROM Operations 6 1 1 1 Comparison of RAM and ROM Operations With the FP2 either RAM operation or ROM operation can be selected for the execution method of the program RAM operation Executes the program written into the internal RAM of the CPU ROM operation Transfers the program stored in the ROM of the expansion memory unit to RAM and executes the program Comparison of RAM operation and ROM operation item o RAM operation ROM operation Items necessary for Nothing in particular since operation is per Optional expansion memory unit FP2 EM3 operation formed by the RAM built into the CPU FP2 EM6 or FP2 EM7 Normal maximum number of steps is 16k ROM with the program written on it With the optional expansion memory unit FP2 EM2 FP2 EM3 or FP2 EM6 installed ke maximum number of steps is a Processes inside Program written in RAM is executed when When the power is turned on the program in the CPU RUN mode is ent
56. Y1 according to the contents of the data table beginning at S S n S n Outputs a pulse from the h FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH High speed counter output reset with channel specification Positioning control with channel specification Pulse output with channel specification specified output YO or Y1 according to the contents of the data table beginning at S PWM output with S Performs PWM output from the channel specified output YO or Y1 specification according to the contents of the data table beginning at 9S High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPOR High speed S Performs high speed counter counter and Pulse DT90052 and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by S The control code is stored in DT90052 Change and read DMV S Transfers S 1 S to high speed of the elapsed DT90300 counter and Pulse output value of high elapsed value area DT90045 speed counter DT90044 a lt output controls and Pulse output Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D Cam control CAMO S Controls cam operation on off patterns of each cam output according to the elapsed value of the high speed counter specification D Target value much HC1S n S D Turns output Yn on when the on with channel elapsed value of the high speed specification counter or pulse ou
57. and read it to the FPWIN GR memory of personal computer SS Procedure 1 Booting the Upload Program from IC Card function On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Upload Program from IC Card Upload Progam from IC Card The IC Card File List is displayed iC Card File List Read Program J Untitiel Tite Type of File TEST1 FP sample FPWIN GR 99 11 28 TEST2 FP samplez FPWIN GR 99 11 28 Matsushita 2 Selecting the file to be read Select the file to be read from the IC Card File List and click on the Execute button Reading of the pro gram begins FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 3 For Use as Program Memory Method 4 Use the F14 PGRD instruction to read the program from the IC memory card and directly transfer it into the internal RAM of the CPU IC memory card STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 By first saving the programs you desire on the IC memory card you can use the F14 PGRD instruction in the program to switch a program while in the RUN mode while in operation The following details the describe the program after executing F14 PGRD instruction The program will continue executing until the END instruction is executed The CPU enters the PROG mode and the program is read from the IC memory card and transfer to the internal RAM of the CPU The CPU automatically switches to the RUN mode and the new program executes A A Example
58. bit data PDBCU data of S 1 S in D Available X Not available Not available partially F127 P127 F128 P128 11 68 FP2SH FP10SH Poo Ope Description Basic function instruction F137 Auxiliary STMR S D Turns on the specified output and s Jolojo oJojo timer 16 bit R900D after 0 01 s x set value Special instructions O o O Special instructions F138 Hours min S D Converts the hour minute and second P138 utes and sec data of S 1 S to seconds data and onds to the converted data is stored in D 1 D seconds data F139 Seconds to S D Converts the seconds data of S 1 S P139 hours to hour minute and second data minutes and and the converted data is stored in seconds data D 1 D Pe e Re E P140 R9009 set PSTC KIRAAN Turns off the carry flag R9009 R9009 reset PCLC Watching WDT S The time allowable scan time for the Pie dog timer Pipe S system of watching dog timer is update changed to S x 0 1 ms for that scan Partial I O IORF D1 D2 Updates the I O from the number update PIORF specified by D1 to the number specified by D2 F144 Serial data TRNS S n The COM port received flag R9038 is communica set to off to enable reception tion control Beginning at S n bytes of the data registers are sent from the COM 2 hae S1 S2 Sends the data to another station in the P145 D N P146 PRECV N D
59. capacity Total number of words The largest total value of the above is 128k words Precautions for Comment Storage Editing of the program cannot be done during ROM operation Transfer the data after set the DIP switches SW2 to off FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 6 Writing Data to the ROM AFP5209 only the FP2 C2 can be installed The master memory is a flash ROM and data can be written to it when it is installed in the CPU However data can only be written when the memory is an EPROM and when a commercially available ROM writer is used Master memory AFP5208 3 Memory R Commercially available ROM writer Procedure of Writing to Memory AFP5209 Using Master Memory AFP5208 1 Turn the power off and install the expansion memory unit FP2 EM7 installed with the master memory AFP5208 to CPU Turn off the DIP switches SW2 of CPU Verify that the PROG mode has activated and turn the power on Using the RAM gt ROM function of the FPWIN GR tool software transfer the contents of the internal RAM to master memory Turn the power off and detach the master memory from the CPU Attach it to the commercially available ROM writer Transfer the contents of master memory to the commer cially available ROM writer The ROM writer settings should be specified as those for the M27C2001 SGS TOMSON Remove the master memory AFP5208 instal
60. circuit driving power of the output units are supplied from the external terminal of each unit For 24V power supply commercially available power supply equipment is used Combining units and selecting a backplane The current consumed by each unit is shown in the following pages Give consideration to the combination of units so that the rated capacity of 5V DC and 24V DC power supplies should not exceeded Example of current consumption calculation The table below shows the combination of typical units on a 9 module type backplane Type Number of units and Current consumption at Current consumption at backplane used 5V DC mA 24V DC mA CPU FP2 C1 i mo o o Backplane FP2 BP09 1 Input unit FP2 X16D2 3 60 x 3 180 8x 16x3 384 Output unit FP2 Y16R 4 120 x 4 480 160 x 4 640 Total current consumption 1130 1024 T 42 FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations Table of current consumption at 5V DC Type Current con sumption at 5V DC mA 410 or less 530 or less 630 or less 1060 or less 750 or less 750 or less 750 or less 750 or less 5 or less 60 or less 60 or less 60 or less 60 or less 5 or less 60 or less 60 or less 80 or less 100 or less 50 or less 120 or less 100 or less 130 or less 210 or less 80 or less 130 or less 210 or less 160 or less 160 or less 400 or less Part number FP2 C1 FP2 C1D FP2 C1SL FP2 C1A FP2 C2L FP2 C2 FP2 C2P FP2 C3P FP2 BP05 FP2 BP07
61. connector 10 3 Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 1 Specifications Table of Weight Type Part number Weight Approx FP2 CPU FP2SH CPU Backplane FP2 Power supply uni DC input Relay output Transistor output FP2 veaP T200 120g I O mixed unit 32 point 24V DC input 32 point connector NPN output type FP2 XY64D2T FP2 XY64D7T 32 point 24V DC input 32 point connector PNP output type FP2 XY64D2P FP2 XY64D7P Intelligent unit Analog input unit FP2 AD8VI 160g FP2 AD8xX FP2 RTD Analog output unit FP2 DA4 160g High speed FP2 HSCT 110g counter unit FP2 HSCP Pulse I O unit FP2 PXYT FP2 PXYP FP2 PP2 FP2 PP4 120g 30g Positioning unit 2 axis type 4 axis type 125g 150g Positioning unit 2 axis type FP2 PP21 105g ution Carver ouput ype FPO P type a axis type FP2 PP41 20g Snee Hine arver output iye FPZ PPa Positioning unit 2 axis type FP2 PP2T 140g interpolation Liner ouput ype Peo PpoL 1504 type a axis type FP2 PP4T 140g O ee tine arver output pe FPe ppat Ts Serial data unit FP2 SDU 120g Multi communication unit Main unit FP2 MCU 130g Communication block FP2 CB232 35g FP2 CB422 FP2 CB485 Computer communication unit mw next page 10 4 FP2 FP2SH Specifications 10 1 Specifications Type Part number Weight Approx Intelligent unit S LINK unit Muliewirelinkunit OOOO o O ew OTTO ET LAN unit ET LAN2 unit
62. constant Change the communication conditions of the COM port or tool port for MEWTOCOL COM based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the operation mode of the high speed counter based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the setting value of the system register for the PLC link function FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Q Available Not available A Not available partially 1 With FP X Ver2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later the baud rate can be selected from 300 600 or 1200 bps 2 With FP 32k type the 8 digit password can be selected 3 With FP 32k type and FP X Ver1 10 or later it can be used 11 58 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH iret ie Data l Data compare instructions instructions 16 bit ST Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 data compare Start gt 1 82 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 a l bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 ST gt ST lt gt bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 5 x eee Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 E E L bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 81 2 Begins a logic operat
63. data left RCL D n Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area rotate with carry PRCL consisting of D plus the carry flag 0o flag R9009 data R9009 data to the left 32 bit data right DROR D n Rotates the number of bits specified rotate PDROR by n of the double words data 32 AEE bits specified by D 1 D to the E right 32 bit data left DROL D n Rotates the number of bits specified rotate PDROL by n of the double words data 32 5 X laj 2 bits specified by D 1 D to the left 32 bit data right DRCR D n Rotates the number of bits specified rotate with carry by n of the double words data 32 le flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the right S together with carry flag R9009 data 5 32 bit data left DRCL D n Rotates the number of bits specified rotate with carry PDRCL by n of the double words data 32 s xlo flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the left e together with carry flag R9009 data Bit manip pulation instructions F130 ieee Sets the value of bit position n of p o o o P130 PBTS the data of D to 1 7 a eee OOOO P131 reset PBTR the data of D to 0 Heal lee OO P132 PBTI the data of D 16 bit data bit test BIT Tests the value of bit position n PBIT the data of D and outputs the ail to R9OOB ler eee a Stores the number of on bits in the P135 bits in 16 bit data PBCU data of S in D BE BE R Steerer bb bits in 32
64. gt lt o LL AI AIA AIA AI AI AIA A Available Intelligent unit error I O unit verify error Opera tion status Description and steps to take An abnormality in an intelligent unit FP x FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90006 and locate the abnormal FP intelligent unit application cassette for FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90006 DT90007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9006 DT9007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function I O unit Expansion unit wiring condition has changed compared to that at time of power up Check the contents of special data register FPO DT9010 FP FP X DT90010 DT90011 and locate the erroneous expansion unit It checks whether an expansion connector is in agreement Check the contents of special data register FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90010 DT90011 FP3 DT9010 DT9011 Selection of operation status using system register23 to contin
65. is placed before an ED instruction Change to PROG mode and enter the instruction into the correct area Program area error A Available Note This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN In this case nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue 11 84 Opera tion status Compile memory full error High level Instruction type error High level Instruction operand combina tion error No program error Rewrite during RUN syntax error Description and steps to take The program is too large to compile in the program memory Change to PROG mode and reduce the total number of steps for the program FP10SH If memory expansion is possible compilation will become possible when the memory is expanded In the program high level instructions which execute in every scan and at the leading edge of the trigger are programmed to be triggered by one contact e g FO MV and PO PMV are programmed using the same trigger continuously gt Correct the program so that the high level instructions executed in every scan and only at the leading edge are triggered separately There is an incorrect operand in an instruction which requires a specific combination of operands for example the operands must all be of a certain type gt Enter the correct combination of operands Program may be damaged gt Try to send the pr
66. me Reem ffe data addition PDB s met pe O a eee subtraction 8 digit BCD data DB D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D Pas suenen poe Oe a ofolololola Eli Old i CEE subtraction subtraction PDB oe eee eee ee ee eee eee SEG00E multiplication mipien POE pen feb multiplication PDB be D 1 S2 D S2 quotient D division PB ae DT9015 8 digit BCD data DB S1 S2 D S141 S1 S2 1 S2 gt quotient division PDB D 1 D Ol 5 remainder DT9016 DT9015 mea p a increment PB 1 8 digit BCD data DB 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D reremen elelele ele pr aremm rex 8 fof lola decrement PB 1 ee ee ee ee 8 digit BCD data D 1 D 1 D 1 D ins decrement PDB 1 Data compare instructions F60 16 bit data CMP 1 S2 4 S2 gt R900A on P60 compare bani all Eo on 32 bit data NE E ANET on compare PDCMP S1 1 S1 82 1 S2 gt R900B on S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on 16 bit data band pn so S1 gt S3 gt R900A on compare PWIN S2 lt or S1 lt or S3 R9YOOB on S1 lt S2 R900C on O Available X Not available A Not available partially FPO FP e FPX 11 64 Boo lean FPO FP e FPX FP2SH FP10SH DWIN PDWIN 32 bit data band S1 S2 S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 gt R900A on S3 S241 S2 lt or S14 1 S1 lt or S3 1 compare F64 Block data BCMP P64 compare PBCMP Logic operation instructions pwa AND PWAN F66 16 bitdata WOR re PWOR 16 bit data XOR exclusiv
67. method Half duplex Half duplex Synchronization method Start stop synchronous system Communication path RS232C cable Two core cable VCTF 0 75mm 2 x 2C Transmission distance Max 15m 49 2ft Max 1200m 3 937ft Transmission speed 1200bps 2400bps 4800bps 9600bps 9600bps 19200bps Baud rate 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115 2Kbps Transmission code ASCII Transmission format Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Parity check none even odd Character bits 7 bits 8 bits Necessary devices in configuration 1 1 communication 1 N communication FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Commercially available computer Commercially available computer Commercially available RS232C cable Commercially available RS232C cable AFB85813 AFB85853 or equivalent AFB85813 AFB85853 or equivalent C NET adapter AFP8536 AFP8532 x 1 piece C NET adapter S2 type AFP15402 x number of PLC Two core cable VCTF 0 75mm2 1 16 FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 3 Expansion Function 1 3 2 Connection of MODEM 1 1 communication 1 N communication Connections to a MODEM can be Using the C NET adapter enables MODEMs to be made using the COM port connected for multiple programmable controller MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM Public line Pi lt TERELT gt xX ee Commercially available RS232C cable anes available RS232C cable FP2 FP2SH E C NET adapter AFP8536 AFP8532 Eaa aaa Two core cable RS485 VCTFO 75 x 2C A maximum of 32
68. oe ee ay dd 2 A programming tool software can be FR REER used to write data DT9073 DT90073 cess 208 to 223 Step ladder pro DT9074 DT90074 cess 224 to 239 Step ladder pro DT9075 DT90075 cess 240 to 255 Step ladder pro DT9076 DT90076 cess 256 to 271 Step ladder pro DT9077 DT90077 cess 272 to 287 Note Used by the system 11 36 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available igs Descriptions FP2SH Tl Bs gt Q Q i 4 V O FP10SH pour oraore oc ao aoa pare prone Ss ano ann eves aio pone ores Soe ano raves prenose e sto ren prove enna rant prenosa e nto rans proves Gaee en rans prenose esto raver pone e azo rans prove S Gan oaa pane oon e eto ran oon e onto pone oreo 23e ano 1 praos proves S ra pans prenos e mca rane prenosa e aio rans proms e Gentera rans ones e eto pany prover Ss cant prone prone e conto rane oon S cio Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process When the process starts up the bit corresponding to the process number turns on 1 Monitor using binary display 0 not executing 1 executing Example Bit position J15 12 11 8 7 4 3 Process number aa5 332 331 328 327 324 323 320 CTA DTSNSO OOOO OOOO O O O JO O O1O17 Since bit position O of DT9080 DT90080 is 1 step ladder process 320 is executing A programming tool
69. of pulses to be input No of pulses to the high speed counter of the cycle for input specified channel pulses ra F175 Pulse output S n Pulses are output from channel Linear in accordance with the interpolation designated data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line 11 72 200 O d Description lean peran p FPO FP e FPX High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPX FP X High speed MV counter and Pulse output controls S DT90052 FP S DT90044 FP X S DT90300 FP DT90044 D FP X DT90300 D Change and read of the elapsed value of high speed counter and Pulse output Target value much on with channel specification Target value much off with channel specification Pulse output with channel specification Trapezoidal control and home return Pulse output with channel specification JOG operation PWM output with channel specification g F167 F171 F172 F173 F174 F175 F176 Pulse output with channel specification Selectable data table control Pulse output Linear interpolation Pulse output Circular interpolation Performs high speed counter and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by S The control code is stored in DT90052 Transfers S 1 S to high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse
70. on the location of the connected ports and the com mands used for communication up to 3 units can be used For more details refer to the Computer Communication Unit Manual 1 10 FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations MEW MEW MEW NET NET NET Ww w2 mode mode mode P EERE pay y a h y 1 T x x x H N Ee ba 6 6 7 8 ze N N N N N N N N N N N E Ld A JA lag leg l 7 AILAIA Alegl A TA JAITAJTAITAITATIA A Available N A Not available Notes 1 When Mode B Unit with interrupt function has been speci fied the unit will be treated as interrupt unit and 8 interrupts per unit will be available for use However when Mode B has been set for the unit 2 units can be used with 1 CPU unit When Mode C Intelligent unit that generate interrupts has been specified and 1 interrupt per unit will be available for use However when Mode C has been set for the unit 8 units can be used with 1 CPU unit 2 Check the limitations on combining link units given below 3 In the MEWNET F mode up to four units can be used counting the CPU and expansion sides 4 With the backplane H type the total expansion cable length can be arranged within 3 2 m 5 The unit cannot be installed on the 31st slot last slot when using the H type backplane 6 The interrupt function is not available for the backplane on the slave station system 7 With t
71. or less at 24V DC Fuse ratings None ooo Common method Output points per 8 points common common Operating indicator 16 dot LED display lit wnen on External connection method Terminal block M 3 screw Weight Approx 150 gt Note The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit Adjust the load current referring to the following range A on oe 100 Max load current mA 4 75 102 26 4 Power supply for driving internal circuit V Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram LED Aa 5 to 24V DC Pin Layout Output YO to YF 5 to 24V DC For more information regarding the applicable pressure connection crimp terminals and wiring refer to section 4 5 1 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 5 32 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit Specifications Maximum surge current on state maximum voltage drop Response time Internal current consumption 130mA or less at 5V DC Common method Output points per 32 points common common Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on External connection method Connector MIL type 40 pin Approx 100g ie Note The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit and the ambient temperature Adjust the load current referring to the following r
72. press fitted without removing the wire s insulation saving labor Procedure 1 Bend the contact back from the carrier and set it in the pressure connection tool 2 Insert the wire without removing its insulation until it stops and lightly grip the tool 3 4 FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units 4 4 3 Connecting the Terminals CT 2 Connector Terminal Use a 40 pin type CT 2 connector terminal For connecting the terminal to the terminal block use M3 sized pressure connection terminals rae Note If using the CT 2 connector terminal for the input connect be tween the COM terminals If using the CT 2 connector terminal for the output 24V DC should be supplied between and terminals Power is sup plied to drive the internal circuit of the output unit Connect between each the terminals and between each the termi nals CT 2 connector terminal connection diagram for 32 point type and 64 point type I O units and I O mixed units FP2 X32D2 FP2 Y32T FP2 Y32P FP2 X64D2 FP2 Y64T FP2 Y64P FP2 XY64D2T FP2 XY64D2P FP2 XY64D7T FP2 XY64D7P Connector terminal cable NG 40 pins 40 pins sli CT 2 connector terminal 40 pins AYC1140 Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units Correspondence table of 32 point type input unit When a 32 point type input unit is next
73. pulse catch input function is installed to slot 0 of the backplane R9013 m ICTL H3 K2 Specifying the interval for the periodical interrupt set to 1ms ED INT 24 Interrupt program R9010 H F143 IOR KI K1 Specifying the word number of I O for I O update IRET Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications Operation of pulse catch l on Input signal input pulse from external device off Note 1 Note 1 Max 0 2 ms delayin 1 to 5ms reception of external a as signal n Reception of external signal SS at I O mixed unit off Signal reception status of the CPU resulting from the periodical interrupt I O update Note 2 Interval of periodical interrupt set in the program eS Notes 1 Reception of external signal at the I O mixed unit Within 0 2ms of the leading edge of the external signal the I O mixed unit will go on This on status will be held for 1 to 5ms the length of time the status is held will depend on the unit 2 Reception of input at CPU that is executing a periodical inter rupt The signal from the I O mixed unit is read by the periodical in terrupt Chapter 3 I O Allocation I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 1 Fundamentals of I O Allocation 3 1 Fundamentals of I O Allocation 3 1 1 1 O Allocation and Registering I O allocation is the process of assigning an I O number to each
74. radian F338 P338 y o Floating point type data radian degree The angle data in radians real number data specified in S 1 S is converted to angle data in degrees and the result is stored in D 1 D Floating point type real number data processing instructions Floating point FCMP S1 S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 R900A on type data compare PFCMP S2 S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt R900B on 10 x OO O S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on u P P P P P i P P P P F346 P346 Floating point type data band compare FWIN S1 S1 1 1 gt S3 1 S3 gt R900A on PFWIN S2 S2 1 S2 lt or S1 1 1 lt or mlela S3 1 S3 gt R900B on Ai op d9 S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 gt R900C on Q Available lt Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later 11 79 4 3 11 80 Boolean l rand Floating point FLIMT S1 S2 type data PFLIMT S3 D upper and lower limit control Floating point FBAND S1 S2 type data PFBAND S3 D dead band control Floating point S1 S2 type data S3 D zone control Floating point FMAX S1 S2 type data PFMAX D maxi mum value Floating point S1 S2 D type data mini mum value type data total and mean values Floating point i 51 S2 D Floating point FSORT S1 S2 type data sort PFSORT s3 Scaling of FSCAL S1 S2 real number
75. software can be used to write data Read ing 11 37 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address FP2 Read ing Descriptions FP3 FP2SH FP10SH sce 6401005 see 26 1 1 _ see ret 7 see 01 109 ie see GOOT a see AoT sos 79610 75 sce SLOTEN is cee GOB OTSA see a8 759 Step ladder pro Monitor using binary display DT9110 DT90110 cess 800 to 815 Step ladder pro DT9111 DT90111 cess 816 to 831 Step ladder pro OLIA BTI cess 832 to 847 Example Step ladder pro 3 DT9113 DT90113 848 to 863 647 644 643 S tadder pro remoro ooo Jo oTo Tolo oTo To To oTo ToT CEA Steg ladder pro Since bit position 0 of DT9115 DT90115 cess 880 to 895 DT91 ane 00 is i step ladder Step ladder pro process is executing DT9116 DT90116 cess 896 to 911 Step ladder pro A programming tool software can be prant7 Sten o Fi to 927 used to write data ep ladder pro DT9118 DT90118 cess 928 to 943 Step ladder pro DT9119 DT90119 cess 944 to 959 Step ladder pro DT9120 DT90120 cess 960 to 975 Step ladder pro DT9121 DT90121 cess 976 to 991 Step ladder pro cess 992 to 999 DT9122 DT90122 higher byte is not used Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process When the process starts up the bit corresponding to the process number turns on 1 0 not executing 1 executing FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Av
76. stations When reading in the program from the IC memory card due to automatic reading because of the dip switch setting or program switching due to F14 PGRD instruction IC memory card is not installed There is no program file or it is damaged Writing is disabled There is an abnormality in the AUTOEXEC SPG file Program size stored on the card is larger than the capacity of the CPU gt lnstall an IC memory card that has the program properly recorded and execute the read once again Abnormal I O unit FP x FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90002 and abnormal FP expansion unit application cassette for FP X Then check the unit FP2 and FP2SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90002 DT90003 and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function MEW NET TR communication error FP3 and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers FP3 DT9002 DT9003 FP10SH DT9 0002 DT90003 and the erroneous master unit and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function FPX gt
77. stored in DT90036 Turns on when the serial data communication error occurs COM port communica using COM port tion error flag Turns off when data is being sent by the F144 TRNS instruction Turns on while data is not sent during the serial data communicating Turns off while data is being sent during the serial data communicating Turns on while the error alarm relay EO to E2047 acts Turns off when the all error alarm relay turns off 11 22 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description ______ R9057 R9058 Remote I O transmission error flag master 1 Remote I O transmission error flag master 2 Remote I O transmission error flag master 3 R9059 R905A MEWNET W P link transmission error flag W P LINK 1 MEWNET W P link transmission error flag W P LINK 2 MEWNET W P link transmission error flag W P LINK 3 MEWNET W P link transmission error flag W P LINK 4 MEWNET W P link transmission error flag W P LINK 5 When using MEWNET W link unit or MEWNET P link unit turns on when transmission error occurs at link 1 turns on when there Is an error in the link area settings When using MEWNET W link unit or MEWNET P link unit turns on when transmission error occurs at link 2 turns on when there Is an error in the link area settings When using MEWNET W link unit or MEWNET P link unit turns on when transmission error occurs at link 3 turns on when there is an e
78. subroutine is cleared aoe a Indicates the start of the subroutine a folofojojolo entry program n vi etrn Ts efell return fe Interrupt instructions INT Indicates the start of the interrupt program i jnlolalalala a tan 91 09 0 08 68 e6 Interrupt IRET eer Ends the interrupt program return Interrupt ICTL H Ho en si Select interrupt enable disable or clear in s alololololo contro S1 and S2 and execute Available X Not available Not available partially 7 Available for FP e only 2 In the FR2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n of a subroutine program has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses I FP2SH FP10SH 11 57 Diis Oo i Special setting instructions Communica tion condi tions setting Password setting Interrupt setting PLC link time setting H HoH arsim MEWTOCOL COM response control High speed counter operation mode changing System registers No 40 to H Lf svs2 s 01 oH No 47 changing Change the communication conditions for the COM port or tool port based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the password specified by the PLC based on the contents specified by the character constant Set the interrupt input based on the contents specified by the character constant Set the system setting time when a PLC link is used based on the contents specified by the character
79. the ROM or IC memory card When loading the specified contents exceeded the capacity Write error occurs ROM or IC memory card is not installed ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications ROM or IC memory card board is not installed A program or system register write operation was executed when Protect error the protect mode password setting or DIP switch etc or ROM operation mode was being used There was an error in the code format of the address data Address error Also when exceeded or insufficient of address data there was a mistake in the range designation Cannot be read because there is no program in the program area or the memory contains an error Or reading was attempted of data that was not registered When inputting with programming tool software editing of an Rewrite during RUN instruction ED SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that error cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU 0 SIM over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process 17 174 Exclusive access A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same i control error time as a command being processed External memory error No program error and No data error 167 11 94 11 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands Table of MEWTOCOL COM commands Reads the on and off status of contact Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts
80. the file to be used for automatic transfer The converted file can be confirmed in the software under the file name Autoex ec spg Select File Copy File gt IC Card Flash Mem kd EA Look in a Documents Z E_fp2sh A i E_fp0 E_p E_p HE5 ME fp10 ig E_ipm mp E_fp10s ii sample WWE fp1Osh a Sample spg WE fp2 File name autoexec Files of type FPWIN GR NPST GR File fp spa Cancel 4h If the card is an SRAM type the ROM amp RAM service menu and IC Card Service menu can also be used FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Executing Programs There are two ways to execute programs written on IC memory cards described below 1 Programs are automatically transferred when the power supply is turned on If the power supply is turned on when the DIP switches on the back of the CPU are set so that both SW2 and SW4 are on the Autoexec spg file stored in the IC memory card is sent to the internal RAM When the mode is switched to RUN operation begins in accordance with the contents of that file FP2SH FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Internal FROM Program Autoexec spo IC memory card 2 Sending programs from the ROM amp RAM service menu If the power supply is turned on when the DIP switches on the back of the CPU are set so that SW2 is off and SW4 is on executing the ROM g
81. the tool port 0 0 cee eee 10 13 Chapter 11 Appendix 11 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers 11 2 11 1 1 Table of System Registers for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH 11 4 11 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH 11 18 11 1 3 Special Data Registers for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 11 29 11 2 Table of Basic Instructions 00 ccc eens 11 54 11 3 Table of High level Instructions 0 0 ccc ees 11 62 11 4 Table of Error codes 0 ccc eens 11 82 11 4 1 Table of Syntax Check Error 0 c ccc eens 11 84 11 4 2 Table of Self Diagnostic Error 0 000 cee eee 11 86 11 4 3 Table of MEWTOCOL COM Communication Error 11 93 11 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands 11 95 11 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD 0 0 ccc eens 11 96 tet ASGINCGOGES uiceeetavenern caste tedeeeeas te eies eee sede eee ee 11 97 NOOK EEEE EE ET EET E EE E T E T EE T EEE TNE l 1 Record of changes 0 0 ccc ccc neces R 1 vi FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures Before You Start Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing e Ambient temperatures 0 to 55 C e Ambient humidity 30 to 85 RH at 25 C non condensing e For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use it in the following environments Direct sunlight
82. to the IC memory card and named Autoexec spg Procedure 1 Booting the ROM amp RAM service function On the Tool menu select ROM amp RAM service bof View f ROM amp RAM service The ROM amp RAM Service window opens ROM amp RAM Service Untitie2 Fa 2 Executing the ROM lt RAM transfer function Select ROM lt RAM and click on the Execute but ton ROME amp RAM Service Untitie2 FA 7 17 IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 3 For Use as Program Memory 7 3 2 Reading the Program There are four methods of reading the program saved in the IC memory card Read the program on the IC memory card and directly transfer it into the internal RAM of the CPU at the same time that the power is turned on Use the programming tool to read the program of the IC memory card and directly trans fer it into the internal RAM of the CPU Use the Copy File from IC Card of the FPWIN GR and select one of the programs saved in the IC memory card and read it to the FPWIN GR memory of personal comput er Use the F14 PGRD instruction to read the program from the IC memory card and di rectly transfer it into the internal RAM of the CPU Method 1 Read the program on the IC memory card and directly transfer it into the internal RAM of the CPU at the same time that the power is turned on By just turning on the power of CPU the device automatically r
83. turns on or flashes a self diagnostic error or syntax check error has occurred Confirm the contents of the error and take the appropriate steps Error Confirmation Method Procedure 1 Use the programming tool software to call up the error code By executing the STATUS DISPLAY the error code and content of error are displayed 2 Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code ascertained above Syntax check error This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting written in the program When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode the total check function automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the program When a syntax check error is detected ERROR turns on or flashes Operation will not begin even after switching to the RUN mode Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode Clearing a syntax check error By changing to the PROG mode the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off Steps to take for syntax error Change to the PROG mode and then execute the total check function while online mode with the programming tool connected This will call up the content of error and the address where the error occurred Correct the program while referring to the content of error 11 82 Self diagnostic Error This error occurs when the control unit CPU unit self diagnos
84. unit Registering refers to registering the I O allocations in the system register of the CPU 3 1 1 1 Types of I O Allocation Methods There are 3 types of allocation methods I O mount allocation arbitrary allocation and automatic allocation I O mount allocation Using the programming tool software NPST GR FPWIN GR the allocation condition of the mounted units is recorded as is to the system register of the CPU Arbitrary allocation The programming tool software NPST GR FPWIN GR is used to create I O allocations and register them in the system register of the CPU In this case no deviations in I O numbers will occur if a unit mounting error was made Automatic allocation If units are installed allocation will take place when the power is turned on based on the states of the installed units eS Note Automatic allocation only assigns I O numbers to mounted units It does not register the allocations 3 1 1 2 Precautions Regarding Registering of I O Allocation If registering is not performed when using arbitrary allocation Automatic allocation will be performed and allocation will be based on the state of the installed units If I O registration has already been performed If the registered information is different from the actual state of installation such as when a unit is changed to a different type or the installation position is changed normal operation will not take place In this case perform registration onc
85. used with PNP collector out put type output units FP2 Y32P FP2 Y64P FP2 XY64D2P and FP2 XY64D7P FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units 4 4 2 Connecting with Connector for Wire pressed Terminal Cable Connector for Wire pressed Terminal Cable This is a connector that allows loose wires to be connected without removing the wire s insulation The pressure connection tool is required to connect the loose wires Rewiring lf there is a wiring mistake or the wire is incorrectly pressure connected the contact pull er pin provided with the fitting can be used to remove the contact Press the housing against the pressure connection tool so that the contact puller pin comes in contact with this section Rated current AWG22 0 3mm dia 1 5 to dia 1 1 Twisted wire of 12 pcs 0 18 3A weas ozme m Note The contact suitable for AWG 22 or AWG 24 is supplied with the product For purchasing a contact suitable for AWG 26 or AWG 28 specify AFP7231FP Connector for Wire pressed Terminal Cable 3 Composition of accessories Unit type z 32 point input unit 64 point input unit 64 point output unit 2 pcs 4 pcs 5 pins x 16 32 point input 32 point output unit Pressure Connection Tool Part number AXY52000FP Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units Assembly of Connector for Wire pressed Terminal Cable The wire end can be directly
86. value area EV Index registers l0 to ID 14 words next page 10 5 Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 1 Specifications tem Number of labels JP and LOOP Number of step ladder 1 000 steps Note 3 Number of subroutine 100 subroutines Number of interrupt program 1 program periodical interrupt allows setting of the time interval within the range from 0 5ms to 1 5s Comment input function Available Note 6 Sampling trace function Max 1 000 samples 4 000 words for 16 contacts and 3 words Note 2 Clock calendar function Available year month day hour minute second and day of week Notes 6 and 7 Inter PLC link computer link remote programming modem and data transfer Watchdog timer memory malfunction detection I O malfunction detection backup battery malfunction detection program syntax check etc Link functions Self diagnostic functions Other functions ROM operation function Note 8 program block edition during RUN mode forced input output interrupt processing test run constant scan and machine language program Memory backup time lithium battery CPU only Min 10 000 hours storage time typical approx 13 000 hours When installed expan FP2 EM1 Min 9 000 hours sion memory unit typical approx 12 000 hours FP2 EM2 Min 8 000 hours FP2 EM3 typical approx 12 000 hours FP2 EM6 Min 8 500 hours typical approx 12
87. will be cleared to 0 4 Operation mode setting on error System registers 4 20 to 28 Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error duplicated use of output I O verification error and operation error occur 5 Time settings System registers 29 to 34 Set time out error detection time and the constant scan time 6 Remote I O operation settings System registers 25 35 and 36 These registers are used to select whether or not to wait for a slave station connection when the remote I O is started and the remote I O update timing 7 MEWNET W PLC link settings System registers 40 to 47 50 to 55 and 57 These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET W PC PLC link communication Note The default value setting is no PC PLC link communication 8 Tool and COM port communication settings System registers 410 to 418 Set these registers when the Tool port and COM port are to be used for computer link general purpose serial communication PC PLC link and modem communication Note that the default setting is computer link mode Checking and changing the set value of system register If you are going to use a value which is already set the value which appears when read there is no need write it again Using programming tool software Produce 1 Set the control unit in the PROG mode 2 Option gt PLC Configuration 3 When the function for which setting are to be entered is selecte
88. will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit and the ambient temperature Adjust the load current referring to the following range T 24V DC e 100 Number of 64 j ponts per 26 4V DC D common which are simulta O 50 spn 24 D neous on D amp x s 12 21 55 4 75 10 2 26 4 53 6 69 8 131 Power supply for driving internal circuit V Ambient temperature C F Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Output indicator LED 8 2KQ AA 5 to 24V DC ee eee ee ee A Pin Layout Output YO to Y1F Output Y20 to YSF Pin layout of first 32 points Pin layout of last 32 points Left side connector CN1 Right side connector CN2 5 to 24V DC Although and terminals are connected internally with the same connector It is rec ommended that they also be connected externally For more information regarding the applicable connectors and terminals refer to sec tion 4 4 1 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications 2 11 1 O Mixed Units Specifications 2 11 1 32 point Type DC Input 32 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit Specifications mem ooo ooo Description FP2 XY64D2T Input specifica Optical coupler Rated input current Approx 4 3mA at 24V DC Approx 5 6K Response time 0 2ms or less Common method Input points 32 points common per common Either the
89. 0 e Memory backup of the SRAM type of IC memory card AIC52000 Is handled by an internal secondary battery When the battery is used for the first time power must be supplied for at least 24 hours to charge it fully When the battery is fully charged data is backed up for more than three months with out the power being turned on Normally the card should be installed in the PLC and power supplied when using it Failing to charge the battery periodically can reduce the backup period and the service life of the battery The backup battery cannot be replaced Xiv FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures Compatibility of FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH and Precautions Hardware Compatibility The unit backplane and other components are not compatible The components for the FP2 are used with the FP2SH When using the FP2 backplane AFP25 the maximum number of expansion points is lower With the FP10SH and FP2 backplane H type AFP25 H up to three expansion boards can be used and a maximum of 2048 points controlled but if using the FP2 backplane with the FP2 FP2SH only one expansion board can be used and a maximum of 1600 points controlled Different types of IC memory cards are used The only type of IC card that can be used with the Part number FP2 C2P and FP2 C3P FP2SH CPU is the IC memory card small PC card The IC memory card for the FP10SH cannot be used Software Compatibility With the FP2SH in comparison with the F
90. 011 00010100 00010101 00010110 00010111 00011000 00011001 00011010 00011011 00000000 00011100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100111 00011101 00011110 00011111 00111111 11111111 00001111 1001 1001 11 7 ASCII Codes b bef o o o o at aia it 11 97 11 98 FP2 FP2SH Index Index A Alarm function 4 36 ALARM LED 8 7 Alarm output 4 37 Arbitrary allocation 3 3 3 7 ASCII codes 10 97 Automatic allocation 3 3 3 15 B Backplane 1 5 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 4 6 Backup battery 4 13 9 3 Baud rate 5 5 BCD 11 96 Before entering a program ix Before turning on the power ix 5 3 Binary 11 96 C Check items 5 3 Clearing registered content 3 17 COM port RS232C 2 11 Comment function 6 16 Communication error message 8 9 Communications specifications 2 11 Computer link 1 15 Connecting the terminals 4 27 Connecting with flat cable connector 4 32 Connection of capacitive loads 4 22 Connection of inductive loads 4 21 Connection of LED equipped limit switch 4 20 Connection of LED equipped reed switch 4 19 Connection of sensors 4 18 Connection of two wire type sensor 4 19 Connector 4 24 Connector for wire pressed terminal cable 4 25 Constants 10 12 CPU backplane 1 4 CPU with 64 points input FP2 C1D 2 12 CPU with IC memory card interface FP2 C2P
91. 2 015 steps 24 063 steps 26 111 steps 28 159 steps 30 207 steps 32 255 steps 18 429 words 16 381 words 14 333 words 12 285 words 10 237 words 8 189 words 6 141 words 4 093 words 2 045 words 0 word Setting example for each area When not using the machine language program area Refer to the tables for the different types given above When using the machine language program area A Area for machine language program B Area for machine language program 18 4 096 words 36 864 words 8 192 words 12 288 words 16 384 words 20 480 words 24 576 words 28 672 words 40 960 words 45 056 words 49 152 words 53 248 words 57 344 words 61 440 words 32 68 words For example for the FP2 16K step type when the area for the sequence program A is set to 10K words and the area for configuration C is set to OK words the area for the machine language program can be set up to 6K words Setting the number of timers and counter system register 5 Timers and counters share the same area If the method of dividing the area is changed the number of timers and counters will also change Total point Default value of Type Timer Counter numbers system register 5 1000 points 24 points ven ROIG mye No 0 to 999 No 1000 to 1023 3000 points 72 points FP2SH FP10SH 3 072 points 3000 No 0 to 2999 No 3000 to 3071 Set value lt n Counter size increases _ Set value n 4 Set value gt n Counte
92. 2 FP2 C2P FP2 C3P FROM or EPROM optional Internal FROM Memory unit AFP2208 or FP2 EM7 FROM is not detachable With the memory unit FP2 EM7 the master memory AFP5208 or memory AFP2509 is required FP2 C2 FP2 C2L FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Internal RAM Internal RAM Expansion memory unit FP2 EM7 Internal FROM Q The Download to PLC function in the FPWIN GR can be used to write programs and comments In both cases programs are stored in the internal RAM of the FP2SH If the FP2 C2 or FP2 C2L is being used comments are stored in the internal SRAM They are not written to the memory unit AFP2208 or FP2 EM 7 If the FP2 C2P or FP2 C3P is being used comments are stored in the comment memory of internal F ROM 2 Programs and data in the internal RAM of the FP2SH are transferred to the user ROM with the RAM ROM transfer function in the FPWIN GR 3 Programs and data in the user ROM are transferred to the internal RAM of the FP2SH with the ROM RAM transfer function in the FPWIN GR 4 If the power supply is turned on with DIP switch SW2 set to on SW4 off pro grams and data stored in the user ROM are automatically sent to the internal RAM in the FP2SH 6 19 FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 2 ROM Operation Method Preparation Turn off the power supply and detach the CPU If using the FP2 C2 insert the expansion memory unit FP2 EM
93. 22 Menus Related to Tool Software 0 00 cece eee eee 7 25 Chapter 8 Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting 8 1 8 2 Self Diagnostic Function i n0dcnet aba echdarnecinee chess dieeset Akt 8 3 8 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition 0 2 cee eee 8 3 8 1 2 Operation When an Error Occurs 0 eee 8 4 TOUDICSHOOUNG ch c8 cou e tema ake iat dens ook ee oe ee ee ee 8 5 8 2 1 Ifthe ERRORLED Lights 00 cece 8 5 8 2 2 Ifthe ALARM LED Lights 0 cece eee 8 7 8 2 3 If the LED POWER of the Power Supply Unit Does Not Light 8 7 Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH 8 2 4 If Outputting Does Not Occur as Desired 8 8 8 2 5 Ifa Communication Error Message Appears 8 9 8 2 6 Ifa Protect Error Message Appears 0000 eee 8 10 Chapter9 Maintenance 9 1 Replacement of Spare Parts 0 0 ccc eee eens 9 3 9 1 1 BACKUP Bale esserne ko rnan tee aes aaa 9 3 9 1 2 Removable Terminal Block for Input and Output Units 9 7 9 2 Preventive Maintenance 0 ccc eens 9 8 Chapter 10 Specifications 10 1 lt SPCCIICANONS 2 ousted ee muacod cue Sees a a ee Sat oh E 10 3 10 2 Relays Memory Areas and Constants 0 0 cece eens 10 10 10 3 Cable Adapter Specifications 0 aaa cc ees 10 13 10 3 1 AFC8503 AFC8503S eee 10 13 10 3 2 AFC85305 AFC8531 AFC8532 For extending for
94. 2SH Maintenance 9 1 Replacement of Spare Parts 9 1 Replacement of Spare Parts 9 1 1 Backup Battery Lifetime of Backup Battery The life of the backup battery will eventually expire and therefore it is important to re place it with a new battery periodically The battery lifetime will differ depending on the Operating conditions i e ambient temperature and the type of expansion memory unit Refer to the table below for a guide as to when to replace the battery Expansion memory unit type Battery lifetime installed ambient temperature 55 C 131 F No expansion memory unit For FP2 10 000 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 13 000 hours For FP2SH 3 500 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 31 000 hours FP2 EM1 Model No AFP2201 For FP2 9 000 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 12 000 hours FP2 EM2 Model No AFP2202 For FP2 8 000 hours or more FP2 EM3 Model No AFP2203 typical lifetime in actual use approx 12 000 hours FP2 EM6 Model No AFP2206 For FP2 8 500 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 12 500 hours FP2 EM7 Model No AFP2209 For FP2 10 000 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 13 000 hours For FP2SH 3 500 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 31 000 hours Model No AFP2208 For FP2SH 3 500 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 31 000 hours A drop in the ba
95. 3 mw next page 4 23 Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units When using cable with pressure connection terminal The connector converted to a pressure connection terminal using the exclusive cable The I O numbers and corresponding pressure connection terminal pin numbers are the same as for connector terminals on section 4 4 3 When using flat cable There is a cable with a connector on only one end When using suitable connector you can use a commercially available flat cable For detailed information section 4 4 4 Table of Connector and Terminal Number or connector pins 40 pins nector for Contact for AWG22 and AWG24 Maintenance part number AFP2801 wire pressed terminal Semi cover cable Pressure connection tool AXY52000FP Using termi CT 2 con DIN rail mounting type AYC1140 Hel nector Connector 1m 3 281ft AYT51403 ermina terminal cable 2m 6 562ft AYT51405 RT 2 relay DIN rail mounting type AY231502 for input terminal AY232502 for output Note 2 Connector 1m 3 281ft terminal Using cable 1m 3 281ft AYT58403 with pres sure connec 2m 6 562ft AYT58405 tion terminal Using flat Flat cable with a 1m 3 281ft AFB8541 cable connector on one end 2m 6 562ft AFB8542 AFP2802 40 pin connectors igs Notes 1 The connectors for wire pressed terminal cable 40 pins are supplied with the unit 2 The RT 2 relay terminal cannot be
96. 4 For master 3 DT9138 DT90138 Not used DT9139 DT90139 Not used pT9140 DT90140 The number of times the receiving operation is performed counted using ring counter DT9141 The current interval between two receiving DT90141 Note1 operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DITTA DT90142 MEWNET The minimum interval between two receiving Note1 W P operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9143 PC PLC The maximum interval between two receiving DT90143 i Note1 link status operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9144 PC PLC The number of times the sending operation is k DT90144 link l l Note1 ink 0 performed counted using ring counter DT9145 DT90145 Sid P The current interval between two sending Note1 Noted 3 operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9146 The minimum interval between two sending x DT90146 Note1 operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9147 The maximum interval between two sending DT90147 Note1 operations value in the register x 2 5 ms Note1 Used by the system Note2 When the system register 46 KO First PC PLC link 0 second PC PLC link 1 When the system register 46 K1 First PC PLC link 1 second PC PLC link 0 Note3 For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH N A N A 11 41 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A No
97. 500 hours FP2 EM7 Min 10 000 hours typical approx 13 000 hours 10 6 FP2 FP2SH Specifications eS Notes 10 1 Specifications 1 The practical usable external input and output points are re stricted according to the number of the input and output units The external output relays Y that not used at the output unit can be used as internal relays 2 The expansion memory unit FP2 EM2 FP2 EM3 or FP2 EM6 is required 3 Hold or non hold type can be set using the system registers 4 Can also be used as internal relays 5 Can also be used as data registers 6 The expansion memory unit FP2 EM1 FP2 EM2 or FP2 EM3 is required 7 Precision of calendar timer At 0 C 32 F less than 90 second error per month At 25 C 77 F less than 40 second error per month At 55 C 131 F less than 98 second error per month 8 The expansion memory unit FP2 EM3 FP2 EM6 or FP2 EM7 is required 10 7 Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 1 Specifications FP2SH Performance Specifications Item FP2SH CPU FP2 C2L AFP2221 FP2 C2 AFP2231 FP2 C2P AFP2235 FP2 C3P AFP2255 Program control method Relay symbol cyclic operation Controllable Basic Using Backplanes Max 768 points 12 modules I O points construction Using Backplanes H type Max 512 points 8 modules Expanded Using Backplanes Max 1 600 points 25 modules construction Using Backplanes H type Max 2 048 points 82 modules Using r
98. 62 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in the PC R9063 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicating properly in the PC R9066 No 7 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error MEWNET W occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode P R9067 PC link transmission assurance R9068 relay for PC link 0 W P Note R9069 R906A R906B R906C R906D Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode 2 Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode E Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properl
99. 7 into the CPU and install the master memory AFP5208 or the memory AFP5209 containing the pro grams Procedure 1 Set the DIP switches on the back of the CPU to ROM op eration SW2 on SW4 off 2 Return the CPU to its original position on the backplane When the power supply is turned on the contents of the ROM will be transferred to the internal RAM es Note Be careful when switching the DIP switches on the back of the CPU When the power supply is turned on any contents stored in the RAM up to that point will be lost FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 3 Precautions When Operating the ROM Precautions Before Turning On the Power Supply At the point when the ROM is installed be aware that operation differs as described below depending on the setting of the DIP switches on the back of the CPU If the power supply is turned on when DIP switch SW2 is on and SW4 is off When the power supply is turned on the contents of the memory ROM are automati cally transferred to the internal RAM and written there Be aware that the previous contents of the RAM will be lost at that point If the power supply is turned on when DIP switch SW2 is off Even if the memory ROM is installed the contents of the internal RAM can be read using the programming tools Consequently to confirm the contents of the memory ROM the contents of the ROM should be sent to the internal RAM To continue us
100. 717 e 128 to 256 Non hold Hold non hold Note Available PLC MEWNET W FP10SH FP2 FP2SH MEWNET P FP10SH 11 10 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH tom tons ame amo amen ress value p Hold type area starting address setting for MEWNET H link relays 128 G Available PLC FP10SH Hold type area starting address setting for registers iepa Available PLC FP10SH hold Hold type area starting address setting for index register 0 to 224 Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Hold type area starting address setting for file register for bank 2 0 to 32765 Available PLC FP2SH Disable or enable setting ES for duplicated output Disable enable Operation settings when MEWNET TR communication error occurs an intelligent unit error Stop Stop continuation occurs an I O verification error Stop Stop continuation occurs Operation settings when a system watching dog timer error occurs Stop Available PLC FP2SH Set the time out time for watching dog FP10SH timer with system register 30 Operation settings when connection time error sceire inthe remote Stop Stop continuation slave station Operation settings when l Operation settings when communication error l occurs in the MEWNET F Stop continuation system Operation settings when error occurs in the slave St Sranicontniat station of the MEWNET F oR epee eon system Stop Stop continuation Stop continuation Action on error N 11
101. 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 2 If the ALARM LED Lights Condition The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been stopped Procedure 1 Set the mode selector of CPU from RUN to PROG mode and turn the power off and then on lf the RUN and ALARM LED is turned on again there is probably an abnormality in the CPU Please contact your dealer lf the ERROR LED is turned on go to section 8 2 1 Procedure 2 Set the mode selector from PROG to RUN mode If the ALARM LED is turned on the program execution time is too long Check the pro gram referring the following Check if instructions such as JP or LOOP are programmed in such a way that a scan can never finish Check that interrupt instructions are executed in succession Procedure 3 If there is nothing wrong with programs there may be a problem with the ambient envi ronment Check the wirings including the grounding link Especially check if the RS232C wiring is not close to power lines and it has been shielded 8 2 3 If the LED POWER of the Power Supply Unit Does Not Light Procedure 1 Check wiring of power supply unit Procedure 2 Check if the output of the power supply unit is in the range of the rating If the capacity of internally supplied power 5V is insufficient investigate different unit combinations Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the power supply
102. 8 bits Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits DT9131 Display contents HO Abnormal slave station H1 I O verify abnormal slave station Slave station where momentary voltage drop is occurring a ae E Display master HO Master 1 H1 Master 2 H2 Master 3 H3 Master 4 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available FP2 FP3 FP2SH FP10SH MEWNET F remote I O error slave station number current condition when DT9131 DT90131 is HO H1 H2 or H3 DT9132 DT9133 DT90132 DT90133 MEWNET F remote I O I O verify error slave station number when DT9131 DT90131 is H100 H101 H102 or H103 MEWNET F remote I O error slave station number record when DT9131 DT90131 is HO H1 H2 or H3 DT9134 DT9135 DT90134 DT90135 MEWNET F remote I O momentary voltage drop slave station number when DT9131 DT90131 is H100 H101 H102 or H103 11 40 Read Descriptions ing The bit corresponding to the station number of the MEWNET F where an error is occurring is set to on Monitor using binary display 1 Error slave station 0 Normal slave station zfs 5 omar TTT PITTI 1 tt mT the installed condition of a MEWNET F slave station set unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to that slave station number will be set to on Monitor using binary display 1 Error slave station 0 Normal slave station sn t d 7 Sara no
103. 8 units Expansion cable 7 N COM port Power supply unit Tool port I O unit Expansion backplane No 1 Power supply unit 1 module I O units 16 point type output 8 units o IS i Expansion backplane No 2 z B Power supply unit 1 module j I O units 16 point type input 8 units 2 Board No setting switch 2 3 11 I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation Registering with programming tool software FPWIN GR Create allocations 1 In No of Slots add 16 to the number of modules used on the ex pansion backplane and enter the result OE is assigned to each of the specified slots In this case enter 24 2 Assign input X or output Y according to the I O units to be installed in each slot In the example assign 16X to slots 0 through 7 16Y to slots 8 through 15 and 16X to slots 16 through 23 annie wi wE wi wi woo we wi wi Registering contents of allocation Write the contents of allocation to the system register of the CPU 1 On the Online menu select Online Edit Mode 2 On the File menu select Download to PLC The program is transferred to the PLC programmable controller and the contents of allocation are simultaneously written to the PLC as part of its system register settings 3 12 FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 3 1 O Mount Allocation 3 3 1I O Mount Allocation 3 3 1 Using I O Mount Allocation The I
104. A Min on current Max off voltage 5 0V 1 5mA Max off current Response time 0 2ms or less for XO to X1F on off 0 3ms or less for XO to X1B 1 0 to 5 0ms X1C to X1F Common method Input points 32 points common per common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal On state maximum voltage drop 1V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time Power supply for Voltage 4 75 to 26 4V DC driving internal circuit 120mA or less at 24V DC Common method Output points 32 points common per common Common specifi Internal current consumption at 150mA or less cations 5V DC Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External connection method Connector two 40 pin Approx 120g Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications eS Notes With a periodical interrupt function 1 ms it is possible to read an on pulse input signal with a minimum pulse width of 0 4 ms For detailed information about the on pulse catch input function section 2 11 5 Keep the number of input and output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as de termined by the input voltage and ambient temperature Input Output 24V DC 26 4V DC Number of points per com mon which are 20 simultaneous on 25 43 51 55 109 4 123 8 131 Ambient temperature
105. C The SW1 off position is the system register setting Depending on the personal computer there are times when baud rate of 19 200bps or greater are not supported If problems occur set both the personal computer and PLC to 9 600bps If SW1 is on the baud rate for the FP2 FP2SH PLC is fixed to 9 600bps Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting FP2 FP2SH 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 6 If a Protect Error Message Appears When Optional User ROM is Installed in the CPU The program of the internal RAM cannot be modified using the programming tool and a protect error occurs Operation 1 Turn off the power supply of the PLC remove the CPU and set the SW2 of DIP switches operation condition switches on CPU to the off internal RAM position Operation 2 Modify the program of the internal RAM using the programming tool Operation 3 Save the modified program to the memory or master memory and start operation again If the Program Memory is Protected Operation Turn off the power of the PLC remove the CPU and set the SW3 of DIP switches opera tion condition switches on CPU to off write enabled position When a Password Function is Used Operation 1 On the Online menu select Online Edit Mode 2 Onthe Tool menu select Set PLC Password 3 Enter the password and select unprotect 8 10 Chapter 9 Maintenance Maintenance FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP
106. Circuit Diagram Input T Input indicator LED AA 3 O O Cc c Output indicator LED Fai i 5 to 24V DC J 2 g g E EE E Pin Layout Input XO to X1F Output Y20 to Y3F Pin layout of first 32 points Pin layout of last 32 points Left side connector Right side connector 5 to 24V DC The COM pins of each connector are Although and terminals are connected internally connected internally with the same connector It is recommended that they also be connected externally FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications 2 11 5 On Pulse Catch Input Function The I O mixed unit FP2 XY64D7T FP2 XY64D7P is equipped with On pulse catch input function The on pulse catch input function has a delay circuit built into the input and is used in combination with a periodical interrupt function to make possible the read ing of on pulses with extremely small widths Readable pulse signals Minimum pulse width 0 4ms Pulse interval 6ms or more Pulse interval 6ms or more Min pulse width 0 4ms Method In the program specify the interval of periodical interrupt and the word number of I O Considerations The interval for the periodical interrupt is determined by the interrupt control instruction Specify the pulse catch I O input with the ICTL and F143 IORF instructions Program example When an I O mixed unit with on
107. D Converts the 32 bit integer data with sign specified by S 1 S to real number data and the D 1 D F327 P327 floating point type converted data is stored in D data Floating point type DINT data to 32 bit integer PDINT conversion the largest integer not exceeding the floating point type data Q Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later F328 P328 Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not exceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D 11 78 Boolean Description rand FPO FP e BRO FPX FP2SH FP10SH FIX PFIX 2 o Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D DFIX PDFIX ci o Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point down to integer Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point off to Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored
108. Erase IC Card The Erase IC Card window opens Frase IC Cara 7 1 IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 2 Formatting and Erasing 2 Erasing the card Clicking on the Execute button starts erasing the data from the card It takes approximately 1 minute to erase all the data Once erasing the data starts the IC memory card ac cess LED on the CPU unit lights up The LED is turned off on completion of erasing 7 2 4 Data Storage Capacity of IC Memory Card When storing a program or data in the IC memory card the data storage capacity is as follows Program file fp SPG FAT area see note Total number of bytes Keep the total number of bytes for the files given above less than the format capacity Note The I O comment capacity changes according to the size of the statements FAT area 256KB format 5 5KB 512KB format 6KB 1MB format 9 5KB 2MB format 14 5KB 7 12 FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 3 For Use as Program Memory 7 3 For Use as Program Memor 7 3 1 Writing the Program By saving the program to the IC memory card it is simple to create a backup or transfer it to another CPU Furthermore by saving more than one program switching between the programs can be done as necessary IC memory card Writing Programs There are three ways to write programs to the IC memory card Use the Copy File to IC Card function in the FPWIN GR to write a progr
109. FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later EAEAKAERENEI ENESES eee S i E J CO C D i 11 77 Boo Ope Description lean rand P314 data sine ooa F315 Floating point type Pon T S D 1 D P315 data cosine PCOS operation Pe Floating point type me TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D data tangent PTAN operation F317 Floating point type SIN S 1 S gt D 1 D operation F318 Floating point type ACOS COS S 1 S gt D 1 D operation F319 Floating point type ATAN TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D P319 data arctangent PATAN operation Floating point type S 1 S gt D 1 D a anc logarithm Floating point type EXP EXP S 1 S gt D 1 D data exponent PEXP data logarithm PLOG data power PPWR data square root PFSQR 16 bit integer datato FLT floating point type PFLT data conversion 32 bit integer datato DFLT floating point type PDFLT data conversion converted data is stored in D 1 D Floating point type INT Converts real number data data to 16 bit integer PINT specified by S 1 S to the 16 conversion the bit integer data with sign the largest integer not largest integer not exceeding the exceeding the floating point data and the FPO FP e FPX FP2SH FP10SH V S 1 S S gt Converts the 16 bit integer data with sign specified by S to real number data and the converted data is stored in
110. FP2 BP09 FP2 BP12 FP2 BP14 FP2 BP11MH FP2 BP10EH FP2 X16D2 FP2 X32D2 FP2 X64D2 FP2 Y6R FP2 Y16R FP2 Y16T FP2 Y32T FP2 Y64T FP2 Y16P FP2 Y32P FP2 Y64P FP2 XY64D2T FP2 XY64D7T FP2 XY64D2P FP2 XY64D7P FP2 AD8VI FP2 AD8X FP2 RTD FP2 DA4 FP2 CPU FP2SH CPU Backplane Backplane H type DC input 16 point terminal type 12 to 24V DC 32 point connector type 24V DC 64 point connector type 24V DC Relay out 6 point terminal type 16 point terminal type Transistor 16 point terminal NPN type output 32 point connector NPN type 64 point connector NPN type 16 point terminal PNP type 32 point connector PNP type 64 point connector PNP type I O mixed 32 point 24V DC input 32 point connector NPN output type unit 32 point 24V DC input 32 point connector PNP output type Intelligent unit Analog input unit Voltage current type 300 or less Analog input unit Channel type RTD input unit Analog output unit 300 or less 600 or less High speed NN o PRCT 50 orles 225 or less 400 or less Positioning 2 axis type FP2 PP2 ani 4 axis type FP2 PP4 FP2 PP21 200 or less FP2 PP22 200 or less type axis 350 or less Di 350 or ess Positioning 300 or less unit RTEX Z axis type 300 or less 8 axis type 300 or less Transistor output type 300 or less 300 or Tess type axis 300 or less type FP2 PP4L 300 or less FP2 SDU 60 or less Multi communication unit FP2 MCU 480 or less with Communication
111. FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions FP2 CPU 2 2 Input indicator LED SE yno peusayu Internal Circuit Diagram Pin Layout The COM pins of each connector are connected internally 2 14 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 3 Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 CPU 2 3 Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 CPU Expansion Memory Unit Parts Terminology 4 Mounting knob 2 Connector rear side 3 ROM IC socket for FP2 EM3 FP2 EM6 and FP2 EM7 Install the optional memory FROM or EPROM Type of Expansion Memory Unit Description IEEE EN GREE M2 REMS EREMO EREM Comment Available Available Available Not Not Writes the I O comments re input i available available marks and block comments in ERAON 128k byte 128k byte 512k byte the program to the FP2 CPU Calendar Available Available Available Not Not Allows operations using the cal timer func available available endar timer function tion Expansion Not Available Available Available Not Increases the program memory RAM available available from approx 16K to approx 32K Also enables use of the trace function ROM IC Not Not Available Available Available Enables the program to be co socket available available pied to ROM for ROM opera tion Type of ROM Equivalent to the 29EE010 120 4C PH SILICON STORAGE TECHNOLOGY FP2 EM4 INC Enables writing with the operation of the programming tools when att
112. FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description _ _ _ _ Turns on for an instant when the compared results become smaller in the F60 CMP P60 PCMP PAYIS lt riag F61 DCMP P61 PDCMP F62 WIN P62 PWIN or F63 DWIN P63 PDWIN comparison instructions Turns on when the set time elapses set value reaches 0 in the timing operation of the F137 STMR F183 DSTM auxiliary timer instruction The R9OOD turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off R900E Tool port error flag sae Note Available PLC FP2SH Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred Constant scan error Turns on when the scan time exceeds the time specified in R900F flag E register 34 during constant scan execution R9010 si Always on relay Aan ooo on R9011 Always off relay aay of off R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off Turns on and off alternately at each scan ssid at each scan mitaronoulsetela Turns on only at the first scan in the operation p y Turns off from the second scan and maintains the off state a Turns off only at the first scan in the operation RAON Mitiakon pu sereiay Turns on from the second scan and maintains the on state Step ladder initial on Turns on for an instant only in the first scan of the process pulse relay the moment step ladder process is opened R9016 R9017 0 01 s clock pulse R9018 relay R9019 st Geer pulse Repeats on off operations in 0 02 s cycles R901A
113. FPS10520 English language Windows Me Windows 2000 menu Upgraded version Windows XP AFPS10520R Windows Vista se Note 1 Ver 1 1 must be installed to install the upgrade version 2 Ver 2 0 can be upgraded to Ver 2 1 or later free of charge at our web site http industrial panasonic com ac e dl_center software Conforms to IEC61131 3 programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 6 Type of software OS Hard disk capacity Product No Operating system FPWIN GR Ver 6 English lan Windows 2000 100MB or more AFPS50560 guage menu Windows XP Windows Vista Note 1 The upgrade version is not available for Ver 6 2 Ver 6 0 can be upgraded to Ver 6 1 or later free of charge at our web site http industrial panasonic com ac e dl_center software Type of computer and suitable cable For the connection between a computer RS232C and the control unit RS232C D sub connector cable PC side connector PLC side connector Specifications Product No D sub 9 pin Mini DIN round 5 pin L type 3 m AFC8503 Mini DIN round 5 pin Straight type 3 m AFC8503S ae Note A USB RS232C conversion cable is necessary to connect with a personal computer without a RS232C port using a PC connection cable 1 20 FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 3 Tools Needed for ROM Creating When Creating ROM with a Commercially Available ROM Writer with Op tional Memory FROM Necessary to
114. M operation or IC memory card operation as the method by which programs are to be executed RAM operation Programs written to the RAM in the CPU unit are executed ROM operation With the FP2 C2L or FP2 C2 programs written to the ROM in the expansion memory unit are sent once to the RAM and executed With the FP2 C2P or FP2 C3P programs written to the internal FROM are sent once to the RAM and executed IC memory card operation FP2 C2P and FP2 C3P are supported Programs written to the IC memory card are sent to the RAM and executed RAM operation ROM operation IC memory card operation SW2 off SW4 SW2 on SW4 off SW2 on SW4 on Items re quired for operation Processing in the CPU Contents of memory backed up by battery in the CPU unit Maintenance None in particular because the RAM provided as standard in the CPU is used Program in the RAM is executed when the RUN mode is ac cessed Programs System registers Hold type data of operation memory Comment data FP2 C2L FP2 C2 only Backup battery needs to be re placed With the FP2 C2L and FP2 C2 an optional memory unit and ROM The FP2 C2P and FP2 C3P are built into the FROM When the power supply is turned on the program in the ROM is sent to the RAM and the program in the RAM is exe cuted Hold type data of operation memory Comment data FP2 C2L FP2 C2 only If the program is in the opera
115. M section is specified as the expanded memory field the card can be used only for reading data Types of IC Memory Cards Memory Part Usage method method Recommended capacity 27 ha application When used to store When used as points programs expanded memory field AIC50020 Data is written to IC memory Serves as dedicated memory No battery back card using Copy File to IC for reading data up is required so Card of programming tool this is ideal for Data is written using pro software saving programs gramming tool software Data is read from IC memory card using high level instruc tion F12 ICRD 2 MB AFP2209 Programs are written to IC Writing of data to IC memory Data can be read memory card using Down card is done using high level to and written load Program to IC Card of instruction F13 ICWT from programs so this is ideal for use as expansion data memory AIC52000 programming tool software Reading of data from IC Discon Programs can be written from memory card is done using tinued internal RAM to IC memory high level instruction F12 products card using ROM lt RAM of ICRD programming tool software Both the SRAM and FROM type can be divided into a format field and an expanded memory field for use When using the card as a program memory there are four ways to read programs Programs are read automatically when the power
116. MRH eV ESS ea esos ETE ea ea a A A R N e a b ka a z i l l EEEREN 10 module type Expansion FP2 BP10EH AFP25010EH FP2 PSA2 0808000 pop i 100 to 240V AC 5A type FP2 PSA3 24V DC 5A type FP2 PSD2 FP2SH CPU CPU with 64 point input FP2 C1D CPU with S LINK FP2 C1SL Standard type CPU FP2 C1 AFP2221 60k step FP2 C2 AFP 2231 Optional memories For FP2 FP2 EM1 FP2 EM2 FP2 EM6 FP2 EM7 Type of memory unit input calendar expansion socket function function RAM reoemt a a na NA FP2 EM2 a a a NAL Fe2 em3 a a a a FP2 EM6 na na A A A Available N A Not available B EPROM FP2 EM5 zE FROM FP2 EM4 AFP2300 Battery SY aeey Set of connector for wire pressed terminal cable 2 pieces Set of flat cable connector 2 pieces AFP2800 AFP2801 AFP2802 EPa tip TIFUN Standard type 32k step FP2 C2L Small PC card compliant type 60k step FP2 C2P AFP2235 120k step FP2 C3P AFP2255 Memory unit for FP2SH baal Li F ROM EP ROM AFP5208 AFP5209 Memory unit ROM socket FP2 EM7 Memory unit for FP2SH Memory unit F ROM implemented AFP2208 Small PC card for FP2SH FROM type IC memory card AIC50020 SRAM type IC memory card AFP2209 SRAM type IC memory card AIC52000 Discontinued products FP2 FP2SH Overview Input Output and I O m
117. N RE 5 points per common which are simulta 47 a neous on 14 a z 4 75 10 2 26 4 43 45 55 Power supply for driving 109 4 113 131 internal circuit V Ambient temperature C F Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Output indicator LED 8 2kKQ AA 5 to 24V DC Pin Layout Output YO to Y1F 5 to 24V DC Although and terminals are connected internally with the same connector It is rec ommended that they also be connected externally For more information regarding the applicable connectors and terminals refer to sec tion 4 4 1 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 7 64 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit Specifications Off state leakage current 1uA or less Maximum surge current On state maximum voltage drop 1V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time at 5V DC Common method Output points per 32 points common common Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External connection method Connector MIL type two 40 pin Approx 120g ie Note The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit and the ambient temperature Adjust the load current referring to the following range 100 24V DC E Number of ar D AAN 26 4V DC points per 43 5 50 common w
118. O allocation state of mounted units is directly registered If an expansion backplane has been added on the FP2 backplane the number of slots for I O units on the CPU backplane is taken as 16 slots The FP2 backplane H type occupies 8 slots only For a slot with no unit mounted an equivalent of 16 points 16E is allocated 3 3 1 1 Example of I O Mount Allocation The I O number in the diagram is the result of execution of I O mount allocation CPU backplane Slots that do not actually exist Backplane 7 module type BeChDIANE SIONO ee a fe ee ce Power supply unit 1 module oo ee eee ae a CPU 1 module wore pero I O units H E E E 16 point type DC input unit 2 units a x 16 point type transistor output unit 3 units JE he 20 Ya S Yao 5 er j t unit o XE XIF Y2F Y3F YAF SF Pa 16 point EEA 16 point ESTA i ei DC Eaves unit transistor se Saat Expansion backplane 7 Backplane 9 module type A ar w a ae Power supply unit 1 module eee ie O units ae 16 point type relay output unit 6 units Qa 2 I 64 point type DC input unit 1 unit eg eee LTS lt 4 Y1 be x 2 ri eo t ie on vet 0 od PA Y1 6F yi TF yi BF yi OF Y20F yor F ka GE 16 point type 64 F relay output unit type DC slot input u
119. ON MI CROELECTRONICS For FP2SH AFP5209 M27C2001 150F1 or equivalent SGS THOMSON MI CROELECTRONICS For the following use commercially available products 3 Commercially available ROM writer A ROM writer than can be used with memory 2 4 Commercially available centronics cable or commercially available RS232C cable Use a cable that conforms with the specifications of the ROM writer ae Note 1 The above explanation describes the case where the memory unit is used in combination with the EP ROM As the nonvola tile memory has been implemented in the memory unit Model number AFP2208 a commercial ROM writer cannot be used for writing 2 The parts for the optional memory to be used differ depending on FP2 or FP2SH 1 22 Chapter 2 Parts and Functions Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable 2 1 1 Backplane Ny Parts Terminology and Functions 1 Backplane mounting holes for mounting the backplane to the control panel Use M4 screw for the mounting 2 Unit guides Align the tab on the unit with this guide when installing the unit to the backplane For use as the basic backplane CPU backplane from the left side of the back plane install the power supply unit CPU I O units and intelligent units in this order For use as an expansion backplane from the left side of the backplane
120. Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperatures 0 to 55 C Ambient humidity 30 to 85 RH at 25 C non condensing For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use it in the following environments Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables pow er equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges 100mm or more Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 1 Installation 4 1 2 Mounting Method 4 1 2 1 Backplane Mounting Hole Dimensions FP2 backplane Type of backplane L mm in 5 module type FP2 BP05 130 5 118 7 module type FP2 BP07 199 7 835 9 module type FP2 BP09 255 10 039 12 module type FP2 BP12 339 13 346 14 module type FP2 BP14 395 15 551 Unit mm in FP2 backplane H type Type of backplane L mm in 11 module type FP2 BP11MH 339 13 346 Basic backplane 10 module type FP2 BP10EH 339 13 346 Expansion backplane Attaching with Screws ie Note Secure the backplane while the
121. Operation 6 6 FP2SH RAM Operation 6 6 FP2SH RAM Operation 6 6 1 RAM Operation Method Check to make sure the DIP switches on the back of the CPU have been set to the RAM operation side SW2 is off CPU rear side FP2 C2 FP2 C2L FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Internal RAM r a Internal RAM Built in FROM Procedure 1 Use the tool software to write programs and comments When doing this programs are stored in the internal RAM in the FP2SH and comments are stored in the in ternal RAM if the FP2 C2 is being used and in the internal FROM if the FP2 C2P or FP2 C3P is being used 2 RAM operation begins when the PLC is switched to the RUN mode 6 17 FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 6 FP2SH RAM Operation 6 6 2 Precautions When Operating the RAM All contents written to the RAM are retained by the backup battery Please pay close attention to the service life of the backup battery ia Note It is recommended to save the programs and data within the CPU in a PC in case that it requires time for the replacement 6 18 FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 1 ROM Operation Function The FP2SH is equipped with a function that causes programs or programs and data to be stored in a ROM FROM or EPROM that does not require backing up This func tion also causes operations to be executed based on the contents of that ROM FP2 C2L FP2 C
122. Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 4 Writing to ROM 6 4 2 Writing to EPROM via FROM Preparation Prepare the optional memory FROM FP2 EM4 the optional memory EPROM FP2 EM5 and the expansion memory unit FP2 EM3 FP2 EM6 or FP2 EM7 Also prepare a commercially available ROM writer Procedure Perform the procedures described in A through D below When writing to EPROM continue on to steps E A Passing the program 1 Pass the program within the CPU Operations using FPWIN GR On the File menu select Upload from PLC and read the program from the PLC On the File menu select Save as and save the pro gram to a disk 2 Turn the power off and remove the CPU from the back plane 3 Install the expansion memory unit FP2 EM3 FP2 EM6 or FP2 EM7 to the CPU Attach the optional memory FROM FP2 EM4 to the expansion memory unit m section 2 3 Optional memory FROM i Expansion memory unit 6 10 FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 4 Writing to ROM 4 Verify that the SW2 of operation condition switches DIP switches on the back of the CPU are set to RAM opera tion position off FP2 CPU rear side a off RAM operation on ROM operation 5 Reattach the CPU to it original position on the back plane B Clearing the program within the CPU rae Note If inputting of the program is done without first performing this operation the contents of the inter
123. P10SH there are no functions that cannot be used For other detailed specifications check the specifications comparison table on the previous page XV Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH Programming Tool Restrictions Restrictions on usable programming tools depending on the units Type of programming tool Type of unit Windows software FPWIN GR Ver 2 Used Used Note 1 Note 1 FPWIN GR Ver 1 Used Used Note 1 Note 1 Windows software FPWIN Pro Ver 6 Used Used Conforms to Note 2 IEC61131 3 FPWIN Pro Ver 5 Used Used Note 3 Note 3 Handy programming AFP1113V2 Not used Not used an AFP1114V2 AFP1113 Not used Not used AFP1114 AFP1111A Not used Not used AFP1112A AFP1111 AFP1112 FP Memory Loader AFP8670 Used Used pe o o tog Note 1 FPWIN GR Ver 2 91 or later version is necessary to use the FP2SH CPU 82k type FPWIN GR Ver 2 40 or later version is necessary to use the multi communication unit FPWIN GR Ver 2 71 or later version is necessary to use the MEWNET VE Link Unit The FNS Unit and FMU Unit cannot use to FPWIN GR Note 2 FPWIN Pro Ver 6 3 or later version is necessary to use the FP2SH CPU 82k type Note 3 FPWIN Pro Ver 5 02 or later version is necessary to use the multi communication unit FPWIN Pro Ver 5 24 or later version is necessary to use the MEWNET VE Link Unit FPWIN Pro Ver 5 24 or later version is necessary to use the FNS Unit FPWIN Pro Ver 5 3 or later version is necessary to use the FMU Uni
124. PFSCAL D data Available Not available Not available partially This instruction is available for FP 32k type 2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 3 J 3 J J Description When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 S3 1 3 D 1 D When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 0 0 D 1 D When S3 1 S3 lt 0 0 S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 0 0 0 0 D 1 D When 3 1 S3 gt 0 0 S3 1 3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D Searches the maximum value in the real number data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 Searches the minimum value in the real number data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 The total value and the mean value of the real number data from the area selected with S1 to S2 are obtained The total value is stored in the D 1 D and the mean value is stored in the D 3 D 2 The real number data from the area specified by S1 to S2 are s
125. PNP type FP2 XY64D2P 32 point input output PNP with on pulse catch input FP2 XY64D7P Pulse I O FP2 PXYT NPN FP2 PXYP PNP High speed counter FP2 HSCT NPN FP2 HSCP PNP Positioning 2 axis Positioning 4 axis FP2 PN2AN Interpolation Interpolation 2 axis Transistor FP2 PP2T Transistor FP2 PP4T FP2 PN4AN Line driver Line driver FP2 PP4L 4 axis FP2 PP2L FP2 PN8AN 8 axis Communication Block FP2 CB485 ET LAN FP2 ET1 ET LAN2 FP2 VE2 FP2 ET2 mnf ofopogofo Ho ees SS ar GH 0 O JOG Communication Block CANopen AFPN AB6218 Communication Block DeviceNet AFPN AB6201 Communication Block PROFIBUS AFPN AB6200 Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations 1 2 2 Combinations That Can be Used and Restrictions 1 2 2 1 Restrictions on Unit Types Backplanes and units used System configuration CPU backplane Install in order from the left to the right the power supply unit the CPU unit the I O and the intelligent units Expansion backplane Install in order from the left to the right the power supply unit the I O and the intelligent Master backplane for slave station system Install in order from the left to the right the power supply unit the Remote I O slave unit the I O and t
126. RAM Operation 6 22 6 7 5 Sending Data from the RAM tothe FROM 6 23 6 7 6 Writing Data to the ROM AFP5209 only the FP2 C2 can be installed 23242044 bdcediand eiteedbiweiad eeandeied 6 25 6 7 7 Writing Data to the ROM Using the FPWINGR 6 27 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 0C3P 6 29 6 8 1 Operating Using the IC Memory Card 0005 6 29 6 8 2 Creating Files for Automatically Run Programs 6 31 6 8 3 How the IC Memory Card is Operated 005 6 32 6 8 4 Transferring Data From the RAM to the IC Memory Card 6 33 Chapter 7 IC Memory Card 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 1 9 Using the IC Memory Card 0 ccc teens 7 3 7 1 1 Types of IC Memory Cards 0 ccc eee 7 3 7 1 2 Using the IC Memory Card 2 ccc ees 7 4 Formatting and Erasing cawiticeok es Geneee ke heu eee hee eee eek 7 6 7 2 1 Program Memory Field and Expanded Memory Field 7 6 7 2 2 Procedure for Formatting the IC Memory Card 7 8 7 2 3 Procedure for Erasing the IC Memory Card 4 7 11 7 2 4 Data Storage Capacity of IC Memory Card 7 12 For Use as Program Memory 000 cee eee eee eee eens 7 13 7 3 1 Writing the Program ccc eens 7 13 7 3 2 Reading the Program ccc cee eee ees 7 18 For Use as Expansion Memory cece eee eee eee ees 7
127. ROM IC socket Make sure that the lead pitch of the ROM matches that of the socket Making sure that the orientation is correct insert the ROM into the socket Return the lock to the locked position completely after the ROM is inserted Lock release Lock When removing or installing the expansion memory unit the con tents of the internal RAM may be erased Therefore always save the program onto a disk before beginning the removal and instal lation operations During the installation or removal operations do not touch the leads on any of the IC with your hands 2 17 Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 4 FP2SH CPU 2 4 FP2SH CPU FP2 C2 FP2 C2P __ _ ORUN F T INITIA QF ROG ae Oist Artest QUREAK QERROR RUN Qratt i O4LARM Standard type CPU Small PC card compliant type CPU Type of FP2SH CPU Operation Internal Optional memory Part Model speed RAM Expansion IC card Calendar Comment number number RAM timer memory 32k steps From 0 03us 32k steps Not Available Not Available Available FP2 C2L AFP2221 Standard available Optional available Built in Built in type CPU 60k steps 60k steps Not Available Not Available Available FP2 C2 AFP2231 Standard available Optional available Built in Built in type CPU 60k steps 60k steps Not Available Available Available Available FP2 C2P AFP2235 CPU with availa
128. SE 0SE x Fp2 pev m Notes FP2 CAN M 1 The occupied I O point of S LINK unit and CPU with S LINK will vary depending on the unit settings For details refer to FP2 S LINK Manual 2 When using a CPU with S LINK the functionality of the slots are increased and slot numbers can be allocated as if two S LINK units were installed For more details refer to FP2 S LINK Manual 3 The occupied point can be set to 0 with arbitrary allocation 4 When the handshake by I O is not used the number of occu pied points can be set to 0 by allocating arbitrarily FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation 3 2 1 Using Arbitrary Allocation In the case of arbitrary allocation I O allocations are decided at the time of system de sign and the allocations are registered in the PLC using a programming tool such as NPST GR FPWIN GR software At this time registration can be performed even if the I O units are not yet installed on the backplane according to the allocations However before operation the I O units must be installed and set as required by the system design 3 2 2 Allocation Example of CPU Backplane Backplane 7 module type Power supply unit 1 module CPU 1 module I O units used 16 point type DC input unit 2 units 16 point type transistor output unit 3 units
129. SH serial data O to 10240 For details about communication mode FP2 0 to 5999 its usage refer to data register number the F144 TRNS Capacity setting for P144 PTRNS received buffer of serial 0 to 1024 instructions data communication 1 to 99 unit No 1 to 99 General commu nication setting mode word number 11 15 Operation of DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions When a leading edge detection instruction DF instruction is used with the MC and MCE instructions the derivative output may change as follows depending on the trigger of MC instruction and input timing of DF instruction Take care regarding this point 0 e 0 X1 Y10 Ho gt hH MCE 0 X Example 1 When system register 4 sets 0 conventional Time chart 1 XO X1 Y10 Frevious execution of DF instruction The trigger X1 for the DF instruction has not changed since the time of the previous execution thus derivated output is not obtained Time chart 2 XO X1 Y10 Previous execution of DF instruction The trigger X1 for the DF instruction has changed from off to on since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output is obtained 11 16 Example 2 When system register 4 sets 1 new Time chart 1 XO X1 Y10 Frevious execution of DF instruction The derivative output is obtained without relation to condition of trigger X1 of the time of previous execution Time chart
130. SH Parts and Functions 2 6 IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 2 6 IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P AIC50020 AlIC52000 AFP2209 i ce b N ge Parts and Functions Write protect switch ON right Read only of the data OFF left Write enable of the data Lock switch It fixes the battery holder RELEASE left Release position Note The lock switch is automatically back to the LOCK position from the RELEASE position when removing the battery holder Battery holder A battery for memory backup is installed A battery is supplied with the product Product number for purchasing separately AFP2806 Role of IC Memory Card The IC memory card can be used as a memory to which programs can be saved and cop ied or as an expanded memory to which data can be read and written in the program The IC memory card can be divided into two areas a format field in which various pro grams are stored and an expanded memory field used as a data memory Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 6 IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P A A Example A 2MB card can be formatted as 1 MB with 1 MB being used as a format field and the remaining 1 MB being used as an expanded memory field The entire field can be used as a format field or as an ex panded memory field and the card used exclusively as a memory card for saving programs or data memory If the FRO
131. T9031 DT9032 The contents of the specified message Note mina are stored in these special data registers DT9033 pT90033 Message 3 when F1 49 MSG P149 PMSG Note instruction is executed DT9034 CNote 0190034 DT9035 CNote 0130035 is cal ae The error code is stored here if F152 a RMRD P152 ae or F153 ris emu GMW TYP ISS PRM isco was e heal When the instruction was successfully DT9036 DT90036 instructions end Heat executed 0 is stored code If an abnormal unit is installed to the Abnormal unit backplane the slot number of that unit N A display will be stored Monitor using decimal display Work 1 for The number of data that match the F96 SRC searched data is stored here when F96 Deere DESNO P96 PSRC SRC P96 PSRC instruction is instructions executed Work 2 for The position of the first matching data F96 SRC counting from the starting 16 bit area is pee tenes P96 PSRC stored here when an F96 SRC P96 instructions PSRC instruction is executed When the instruction was successfully instructions end eet sod executed 0 is stored Note Used by the system ae een The error code is stored here if F145 and SEND P145 PSEND or F146 RECV DT9039 DT90039 F146 RECV fs aaa instruction was executed P146 PRECV y FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Real Time Clock DT90053 Clock Calendar monitor
132. To avoid accidentally losing programs destroying files or overwriting the contents of a file documents should be printed out and then saved Disks should be organized to assure safe maintenance Specifying the password carefully The password setting is designed to avoid programs being accidentally overwritten If the password is forgotten however it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to Also if a password is forcibly bypassed the program is deleted When specifying the password note it in the specifications manual or in another safe location in case it is forgotten at some point Saving programs to the ROM In order to prevent programs from being lost if the backup battery runs down and to prevent accidental overwriting of programs in the workplace we recommend saving programs entered in the RAM to the ROM If the PLC is used over a long period of time this concern applies particularly to programs that are built into the device when shipped Check the manuals for specifications and other items pertaining to usage FP series Programming Manual xi Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH Compatibility with CPU unit and Precautions Comparison of Specifications FP2 CPU FP2SH CPU FP10SH CPU FP2 C1 FP2 CiD FP2 C2L FP2 C2 AFP AFP FP2 C1A FP2 C1SL FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 6221V3 6211V3 Basic construction Using Backplanes Max 768 points 12 modules Controllable 1 O points Max 512 points M
133. U system Manual An abnormal unit is installed FP FROR FPOR mode FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data register DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit Then S turn off the power and replace the unit with a tops new one FP3 Check the contents of special data register DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one MEWNET F A unit which cannot be installed on the slave station of the MEWNET F link system is i Stops installed on the slave station AJA illegal unit gt Remove the illegal unit from the slave station MEWNET F The number of slots or I O points used for remote MEW NET F remote I O system exceeds the Stops limitation AIA faa aee Re configure the system so that the limitation number of slots and I O points is within the specified range MEWNET F I O overlap or I O setting that is over the I O St range is detected in the allocated I O and AlA mapping OPS MEWNET F I O map error Re configure the I O map correctly A Available gt gt gt 11 87 11 88 Opera tion status MEWNET F slave I O terminal Stops mapping error IC card read error Sele I O error Description and steps to take I O mapping for remote I O terminal boards remote I O terminal units and I O link is not correct Re configure the I O map for slave stations according to the I O points of the slave
134. W P Note2 3 Note1 Used by the system Note2 When the system register 46 KO First PC PLC link 0 second PC PLC link 1 When the system register 46 K1 First PC PLC link 1 second PC PLC link 0 Note3 For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH 11 42 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address ae Descriptions Be ac FP2SH ing FP10SH Link unit no Note Error flag Note A N A DT9162 DT90162 W P link 2 Stores the unit No of link 2 Note DT9163 DT90163 W P link 2 Stores the error flag of link 2 Note DT9164 DT90164 W P link 3 Stores the unit No of link 3 Note Error flag DT9165 W P link 3 Stores the error flag of link 3 Note Link unit no W P link 4 DT90166 Available Stores the unit No of link 4 PLC FP2SH FP10SH Error flag W P link 4 DT90167 Available Stores the error flag of link 4 PLC FP2SH FP10SH Link unit no W P link 5 DT90168 Available Stores the unit No of link 5 PLC FP2SH FP10SH Error flag W P link 5 DT90169 Available Stores the error flag of link 5 PLC FP2SH FP10SH Note For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH 11 43 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available co Ares Descriptions He aS FP2SH ing FP10SH Station number whe
135. a sufficient distance from wiring ducts and other machines below and above the unit for proper ventilation Do not install the units stacked up or horizontally Doing so will prevent proper cooling of the unit and cause overheating inside the PLC programmable controller Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such as heaters transformers or large scale resistors In order to eliminate any effects from noise emission power wires and electromagnetic devices should be kept at least 100 mm 13 937 in away from the surfaces of the unit When installing the unit behind the doors of the operation panel be especially careful to maintain these distances Duct Eig mm 1 97 in ace E E EEE or more 50 mm 1 97 in or more Duct Incorrect Stacked up Incorrect Horizontal installation 50 mm 1 97 in installation or more 50 mm 1 97 in or more Duct Incorrect Upside down Correct Proper installation installation 100 mm 13 937 in or more Other device FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 1 Installation Space of Programming Tool Connection Leave a space of at least 170mm 6 693in from the mounting surface for programming tool connections and wiring Approx 110mm 4 331 in Peripheral connection cable 170mm 6 693in or more
136. ached to the CPU Equivalent to the M27C1001 12F1 SGS THOMSON MICROELECTRONICS FP2 EM5 A commercially available ROM writer is required for writing 2 15 Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 3 Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 CPU Installation Procedure Installing the expansion memory unit Procedure 1 OF gee oe 8 9 10 Send the program and data to the personal computer using the program ming tool software NPST GR or FPWIN GR Save the program and data to the disk Set the mode selector of the FP2 CPU to PROG Turn off the power supply and remove the FP2 CPU Remove the retaining screw Retaining screw EAA Install the expansion memory unit Secure the expansion memory unit with the retaining screw Retaining screw Install the FP2 CPU to the backplane and turn on the power supply Perform a program clear using the programming tool software Send to the FP2 CPU the program and data saved in step 2 above For the FP2 EM2 FP2 EM3 and FP2 EM6 continue with the procedures below 11 12 At the NPST Configuration menu for NPST GR or Select PLC Type menu for FPWIN GR of programming tool software set the PLC type to FP2 32K Set the program capacity with system register O 2 16 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 3 Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 CPU Installing the ROM Procedure 1 2 3 ICN Note Release the lock for the
137. ackplane install in order from the left to the right the power supply unit the CPU the I O and the intelli gent units With the expansion backplane install in order from the left to the right the power supply unit the I O and the intelligent units Install a power supply unit on to the expansion backplane as well Do not install a CPU on to the expansion backplane 2 FP2 backplane H type The basic FP2 backplane that the CPU unit can be installed and the expansion backplane that other various units can be installed are available The positions to install a power supply unit CPU unit and I O units are fixed When using a 1 module type power supply unit a space of 1 module will be created between the power supply unit and CPU unit or between the power supply unit and I O units Do not put the wiring in the space in order to prevent the effect of radiation noise Set the board No setting switches on the expansion back plane A power supply unit is also necessary on an expansion back plane FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 1 Installation Procedure 1 Insert the installation tabs on the rear of the unit into the top of the backplane 2 Push the unit in the direction of the arrow and install onto the backplane When installing the unit to the backplane make sure the retaining hook firmly clicks into place and that the unit is properly secured to the backplane Retaining hook 3 Attach th
138. ailable N A Not available Address FP3 DT9123 DT9124 DT9125 DT9126 Note DT9123 DT9124 DT9125 DT9127 Note DT9128 Note DT9129 DT9130 DT9131 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH DT90123 DT90124 DT90125 DT90126 DT90127 DT90128 DT90129 DT90130 DT90131 Forced on off operating station display MEWNET F system remote I O service time MEWNET F remote I O slave stations abnormality checking for selecting the display contents and master of DT9132 to DT9135 DT90132 to DT90135 Note Used by the system Descriptions This displays the unit number that has executed forced on off operation The number of times which MEWNET F remote I O service was performed by each master is stored Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits N NNi For master 2 For master 1 The number of times which MEWNET F remote I O service was performed by each master is stored Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits I eee For master 4 For master 3 The contents displayed by DT9132 to DT9135 DT90132 to DT90135 will change depending on the contents of stored in DT9131 DT90131 Use the programming tools software to write the settings for what you want to display this can also be done with the FO MV move instruction Set the code HO or H1 specifying the display contents in the higher 8 bits and set the code HO to H3 specifying the display master in the lower
139. all the way seated in the IC memory card The lock swich is automatically back to the LOCK posi tion when removing the battery holder In this state insert the battery holder all the way seated Confirm the lock switch is in the LOCK position 4 14 FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 2 Power Supply Wiring 4 2 Power Supply Wiring 4 2 1 Wiring of Power Supply Pin layout of power supply unit FP2 PSA1 is used for the example below Power supply terminals Supplies 100 to 120V AC Use separate systems for the power devices and the input devices ge 2mm AWG14 twisted pair D i A L T cable or larger Ne a Breaker i CM MAM KAMA MKM MAMMA MK A MS AEN 0 4A 50 60Hz O J N TRS AER i Ground terminal i Use an insulated transformer ER when effects from noise are ise ALARM great COM ALARM output terminals An alarm output can be output when the ALARM NO condition occurs mF section 4 6 3 NC 1A 30V UA1 Sy Grounding Power supply voltage Verify that the power supply voltage connected to the power supply unit is within allow able limits Rated input Operating voltage rage Rated output current voltage AC type FP2 PSA 1 100 to 120V AC 85 to 132V AC FP2 PSA2 200 to 240V AC 170 to 264V AC FP2 PSA3 100 to 240V AC 85 to 264V AC DC type FP2 PSD2 24V DC 20 4 to 31 2V DC Power supply wire Use power supply wire that is thicker than 2mm AWG14 to minimize the v
140. am saved on a disk directly to the IC memory card All types of cards can be used for this Write programs created with the FPWIN GR directly to the IC memory card This can only be done with SRAM types Write programs in the RAM of the CPU to the IC memory card This can only be done with SRAM types When writing programs to the FROM type of card the program should be saved to a disk before using the Copy File to IC Card function of the FPWIN GR to write the program to the IC memory card 7 13 IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 3 For Use as Program Memory Method 1 Use the Copy File to IC Card function in the FPWIN GR directly write the program that is saved on the disk to the IC memory card For all types of IC memory card Procedure For FROM types See section 7 2 2 Procedure for Formatting the IC Memory Card For SRAM types 1 Boot the Copy File to IC Card function On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Copy File to IC Card Copy File to IC Card The Select File window opens RAM 2 x i E_fpt ii E_fp5 ii E_fp10 i E_ipm I E_fp10s sample WE fp1Osh a Sample spq FPWINGR NPST GRFile fp spa next page 7 14 FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 3 For Use as Program Memory 2 Selecting the file to be copied Select the file to be copied to the IC memory card and click on OK Writing of the file to
141. ance 92 Preventive Maintenance Although the FP2 FP2SH system has been designed in such a way to minimize mainte nance and offer troublefree operation several maintenance aspects should be taken into consideration If preventive maintenance is performed periodically you will minimize the possibility of system malfunctions Inspection item Inspection description Basis of judgement Power supply unit Check POWER LED on power Normal if on Section 2 7 supply unit Power supply unit Periodic replacement 20 000 hours of operation CPU display On in RUN state Input output unit Check input output display LED Normal if light during on and Section 2 8 display not light during off Installation condition Backplane mounting looseness Securely mounted Section 4 1 1 and Looseness and or play in unit 4 1 2 Connection condition Looseness of terminal screw No looseness Section 4 1 3 Proximity of connection in pinch Pinched parallel 4 2 4 4 and 4 5 terminal Connector looseness Locked in Connection condition of expan Connector section is not loose sion cable Power supply voltage Voltage between terminals FP2 PSA1 100 to 120V AC Section 4 2 1 of power supply unit FP2 PSA2 200 to 240V AC FP2 PSA3 100 to 240V AC FP2 PSD2 24V DC for input output unit to 2 11 Ambient environment Section 4 1 1 Backup battery Battery for CPU Regular replacement Section 9 1 1 Battery for IC memory card Chapter 10
142. and Functions 2 8 Input and Output Units Table of Input Unit Types Type Number of Connection Description Part number points method DC input 16 points Terminal block 12 to 24V DC sink source input FP2 X16D2 type 32 points 24V DC sink source input FP2 X32D2 64 points 24V DC sink source input FP2 X64D2 Table of Output Unit Types Type Number of Connection Description Part number points method Relay output Terminal block 5A Without relay sockets FP2 Y6R ue 16 points Terminal block 2A Without relay sockets FP2 Y16R Transistor 16 points Terminal block 5 to 24V DC 0 5A FP2_Y16T area a ET ne igs Note The maximum load current for the transistor output type output unit will differ depending on the operating voltage Refer to the specifications pages for each unit Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 8 Input and Output Units Table of I O Mixed Unit Types Type Number of Connection Description Part number points method DC input transistor NPN 32 input Connector 24V DC sink source input FP2 XY64D2T open collector output type points 32 output 5 to 24V DC 0 1A points DC input transistor PNP 32 input Connector 24V DC sink source input FP2 XY64D2P open collector output type points 32 output 5 to 24V DC 0 1A points DC input with on pulse 32 input Connector 24V DC sink source input FP2 XY64D7T catch input function transis points tor NPN open collector 32 output 5 to
143. and N C nor mally closed This can be used as an external alarm signal when an error occurs Power supply unit Lamp for alarm signal Watchdog timer The watchdog timer is a program error and hardware error detection timer It goes on when the scan time exceeds 640 ms When the watchdog timer is activated at the same time the ALARM LED lights the ALARM contacts on the power supply unit go on all outputs to the output units are turned off and the unit is put in halted state The system is in anon processing state that includes communications with programming tools as well rae Note The ALARM contacts of the power supply unit installed on the expansion backplane will not also operate Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 6 Safety Measures Chapter 5 Procedure Until Operation Procedure Until Operation FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Procedure Until Operation 5 1 Before Turning ON the Power 5 1 Before Turning ON the Power 5 1 1 Check Items After wiring be sure to check the items below before turning on the power supply to the FP2 FP2SH system item Description S Unit mounting status Does the unit type match the device list during the design stage Are the unit mounting screws properly tightened Is the unit dust protected label detached Are the installation screws for the expansion memory unit properly tightened Does the power supply unit type match the actual power supply Is the loc
144. ange T 24V DC T100 E 32 5 Number of 26 4V DC points per O 5 50 common which 20 are simulta p neous on lt g 4 75 10 2 26 4 46 55 Power supply for driving 114 8 131 internal circuit V Ambient temperature C F Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Output indicator LED 9 1kQ Aa Pin Layout Output YO to Y1F 5 to 24V DC 5 to 24V DC Although and terminals are connected internally with the same connector It is rec ommended that they also be connected externally For more information regarding the applicable connectors and terminals refer to sec tion 4 4 1 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 6 32 point Type Transistor PNP Output Unit Specifications Maximum surge curren on state maximum voltage drop 1 5V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time Internal current consumption 130mA or less at 5V DC Common method Output points per 32 points common common Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit wnen on External connection method Connectors MIL type 40 pin Approx 100g The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit and the ambient temperature Adjust the load current referring to the following range T 26 4V DC aE Number of 32 A
145. are 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 F99 P99 Data table shift in CMPW S D1 and compress PCMP Transfer S to D1 Any parts of the data between D1 and D2 that are 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 F100 Right shift of P100 multiple bits n bits in a 16 bit data F101 Left shift of multiple SHL P101 bits n bits in a 16 PSHL bit data F102 Right shift of n bits DSHR P102 in a 32 bit data PDSHR Left shift of n bits in DSHL a 32 bit data PDSHL F105 Right shift of one BSR D n Shifts the n bits of D to the right D EJ D n Shifts the n bits of D to the left D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the right D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the left Shifts the one digit of data of D to CES P105 hexadecimal digit 4 PBSR the right bit F106 Left shift of one BSL Shifts the one digit of data of D to P106 hexadecimal digit PBSL the left 4 bit D1 Shifts the n bits of data range by D2 n D1 and D2 to the right Pioa Petr P108 multiple bits n bits PBITR F109 BITL D1 Shifts the n bits of data range by P109 bits n bits PBITL D2 n D1 and D2 to the left WSHR D1 Shifts the one word of the areas by word 16 bit PWSHR D2 D1 and D2
146. ation ode reek corn Sop off Varies off off TEST operation eS operating H condition Abnormal off Varies Varies on Varies off When a Self diagnostic error occurs Stop condition break condition on off off off on Varies off When a self diagnostic error occurs Operation operating condition e heed lied ON CM a When CPU backup battery error occurs Operation Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies fon When a watchdog timer error occurs Stop aie s When remote I O slave station waiting Stop error occurs Status Indicator of CPU The CPU has a self diagnostic function which identifies errors and stops operation if necessary When an error occurs the status of the status indicator LEDs on the CPU vary as shown in the table above __FP2 C1_ RUN INITIAL PROG _ TEST TEST Status BREAK indicator ERROR RUN LEDs BATT REMOTE QO ALARM PROG Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting FP2 FP2SH 8 1 Self Diagnostic Function 8 1 2 Operation When an Error Occurs Normally if an error occurs the operation stops There are some instances in which operation continues even if an error occurs such as with a battery error The user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped if a duplicated output error or operation error occurs by setting the system registers You can set the system registers for error which operation is to be continued or stopp
147. available PLC type FP3 FP10SH FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Descriptions FP10SH File register bank shelter DT90264 number eed Nae of the file register Available ank Is stored here PLC FP2SH Free compile memory Free capacity of compile memory is DT90265 capacity stored here If the program memory is Available 120K steps the capacity of 1st program PLC FP2SH block is stored FP10SH Free compile memory see Dock If the program memory is 120K steps free DT90266 i g capacity of program block 2 compile Available memory is stored here PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90267 Notused f CNA CNA Index register bank current pT90268 value The current value of index register bank is Available stored here PLC FP2SH FP10SH A A Index register bank shelter DT90269 number The shelter number of index register bank Available is stored here PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90399 Notused f CNA CNA Number of the The total of the error alarm relay which aah ui went on is stored here Max 500 ao T II data in th larm buffer pronto werton Oea Saano erora baten a na Available r PLC FP2SH DF lt R DT90400 gt FP10SH E lt 11 49 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address FP2 1 0 oO FP2SH FP10SH First error alarm relay which went on pee Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Second err
148. ax 2 048 points Using Backplanes H type Max 512 points 8 modules Expanded construction Using Backplanes Max 1 600 points 25 modules Using Backplanes H type Max 2 048 points 82 modules Using remote I O Max 2 048 points Max 8 192 points Max 8 192 points system Program capacity Internal memory Approx 16k steps Approx 60k steps Approx 30k steps For FP2 C8P approx 120k steps Using expansion Approx 32k steps Approx 60k steps memory 120k steps Operation speed Basic instructions From 0 35us per From 0 03us per From From typical value instruction instruction 0 instruction High level instructions From 0 93us per From 0 06us per From From instruction instruction 0 instruction instruction Operation External input X 2 048 points 8 192 points 8 192 points O O D T T dp op O O O O O O NO La O O T T op dp O O O O instruction nea External output Y 2 048 points 8 192 points 8 192 points P Internal relays R 4 048 points 14 192 points 14 192 points 10 240 points 2 048 point 2 048 point Memory 10 240 words 0 areas File registers FL to 14 333 words FP2 C2L 32 765 32 765 words when expanding O words to 30 717 words FP2 C2 FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 32 765 Timer counter T C Total 1 024 points Total 3 072 points Total 3 072 points words x 3 banks 8 448 words Link data registers 256 words 8 448 words LD Timer counter s
149. aximum size Then copy the program from a floppy disk or the hard disk to the IC memory card SRAM type Procedure On the Tool menu choose IC Card Service and then Format IC Card to format the entire field Using the Card Only as a Data Memory Area When using the card only to expand the data memory area the entire IC memory card must be designated as an expanded memory field FROM type Procedure 1 On the Tool menu choose IC Card Service and then Erase IC Card to erase the entire field 2 Using the Data Editor supplied with the FPWIN GR run the Download to PLC function and transfer the data SRAM type Procedure On the Tool menu choose IC Card Service and then Erase IC Card to erase the entire field FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card Using Different Sections of the Card as a Program Memory Field and 7 2 Formatting and Erasing Expanded Memory Field Any desired settings may be entered for the field to be formatted Of the entire field any part of the field not formatted program memory field is used to expand the memory field FROM type Procedure SRAM type Procedure On the Tool menu choose IC Card Service and then Erase IC Card to erase the entire field On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Copy File to IC Card to specify the format size Then copy the program fro
150. backplane Install the expan sion memory unit FP2 EM3 FP2 EM6 or FP2 EM7 to the CPU Then install the ROM that writes the program to the expansion memory unit section 2 3 Procedure 1 Set the operation condition switches DIP switches on the back of the CPU for ROM operation SW2 on FP2 CPU rear side a on ROM operation off RAM operation 2 Reattach the CPU to the original position on the back plane When the power supply is turned on the program in the ROM is transferred to the internal RAM ia Note When the power supply is turned on the data that was in the RAM will be erased FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 3 FP2 ROM Operation 6 3 2 Verifying the ROM Contents in RAM Operation When the operation condition switches DIP switch on the rear side of the CPU is set for RAM operation the CPU reads the contents of the internal RAM To check the con tents of the ROM you must first copy the contents to RAM by following the procedure below Preparation Have programming tool software ready for use Set the CPU to the PROG mode Procedure 1 2 On the Online menu select Online Edit Mode On the Tool menu select ROM amp RAM Service SOMARAM Service Untitles i OWS Ra C ROM RAM Transfer the pogam system register ete etoted in fhe ROM into the mienal RAM of PLC Select ROM gt RAM and click Execute button Th
151. ber of units that can be installed is determined by the number of modules of the backplane used and the power supply unit to be installed FP2 aan e T T 1 module type 6 slots free 8 slots free 11 slots free 13 slots free power supply meoc 4 p i p eae OS ye unit Loo ooo Lo A 2 module type 5 slots free 7 slots free 10 slots free 12 slots free power supply Tlo a A D e e a unit H T H bh T slots free Number of slots where units can be installed FP2 backplane H type 1 module type power supply unit 2 module type power supply unit Note Although the connectors for installing I O units are free with a 1 module type pow er supply unit they cannot be used Expansion cable Length FP2 EC FP2 EC2 Note With the backplalne H type the total cable length can be arranged within 3 2 m Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations 1 2 1 Line Up of Backplanes and Units Power supply units 100V AC 2 5A type FP2 PSA1 200V AC 2 5A type Backplanes for CPU and expan sion backplanes The 5 module type backplane can not be used for expansion 5 module type FP2 BP05 7 module type FP2 BP07 a 9 module type FP2 BP09 12 module type FP2 BP12 14 module type FP2 BP14 Backplanes H type 11 module type Basic FP2 BP11MH AFP25011
152. ble Built in Optional Built in Built in IC memory card interface 120k steps Not Available Available Available Available FP2 C3P AFP2255 CPU with IC available Built in Optional Built in Built in memory card inter face 2 18 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 4 FP2SH CPU 2 4 1 32k 60k Step Standard Type CPU FP2 C2L FP2 C2 Parts Terminology and Functions Q Status indicator LEDs page 2 9 display the operating condition and error statuses 2 Initialize test switch page 2 9 Setting the switch to the INITIAL side clears errors and initializes the operation memory Setting the switch to the TEST side puts the PLC in the test operation mode 3 Mode selector page 2 10 is used to change the operation mode of the PLC This is used to switch between the RUN REMOTE and PROG modes 4 COM port RS232C page 2 11 is used to connect a computer or general serial devices 5 Tool port RS232C is used to connect a programming tool 6 Operation condition switches page 2 21 are used to set the baud rate of the programming tool to select the program memory and to select the writing operation for the program memory 7 Memory backup battery for backup of the internal memory RAM Part number AFC8801 CR2450 or equivalent 2 19 Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 4 FP2SH CPU 2 4 2 CPU with IC Memory Card Interface FP2 C2P FP2
153. block 1 unit or 2 unit Positioning 2 axis unit Multi type function Positioning 2 axis unit Inter type polation mw next page 1 13 Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations Part number Current con sumption at 5V DC mA Intelligent C C U FP2 CCU 60 or less unit S LINK unit FP2 SL2 130 or less Multewirelinkunit PM 220 or Tess Remote I O Slave Unit FP2 RMS 150 or less MEWNET VE Link unit FP2 VE 670 or less FNS unit FNS unit FP2 FNS 55 or less FP FNS Block Device Net AFPN AB6201 65 or less FMU unit PROFIBUS FP2 DPV1 M 450 or less Table of current consumption at 24V DC Type Part number Current consumption at 24V DC mA DC input 16 point terminal type 12 to 24V DC FP2 X16D2 8 or less per one point 32 point connector type 24V DC FP2 X32D2 4 3 or less per one point 64 point connector type 24V DC FP2 X64D2 4 3 or less per one point Relay output 6 point terminal type FP2 Y6R 16 point terminal type FP2 Y16R 160 or less I O mixed unit 32 point 24V DC input 32 point connector NPN FP2 XY64D2T 32 point 24V DC input 32 point connector PNP FP2 XY64D2P Input 4 3 or less per one point output type FP2 XY64D7P Notes The input unit displays the current flowing to the internal cir cuit The other units display the current value required to drive the internal circuit This value does not include the load cur ren
154. cted during the self diagnostic function BATT red This lights when the voltage of the backup battery drops below a specific value ALARM red This lights if a hardware error occurs or if operation slows because of the program and the watchdog timer is activated Initialize Test Switch This switch clears errors initializes the operation memory and sets the test operation mode Switch position Operation mode INITIALIZE upward In the PROG mode The contents of the operation memory are initialized However the system register including the I O map and the program are not initialized If the error of self diag nostic error code 42 or lower is occured the special internal relays R9000 to R9008 and the special data register DT90000 are not cleared In the RUN mode Operation errors remote I O system errors and battery errors are cleared center The switch should normally be left in this position TEST Setting this switch to the downward position in the PROG mode accesses the test downward mode Switching to the RUN mode in this state initiates test operation To return from the test mode to the normal operation return this switch to the center position in the PROG mode i Note By turning on the initialize test switch while in the PROG mode you can be specify the type of operation memory to be cleared with system register 4 Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 2 FP2CPU Mode Selector Use
155. cted to common terminal Output specifica 1 5V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time 0 E driving internal Common method Output points 32 points common per common Common specifi Internal current consumption at 150mA or less cations 5V DC Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External connection method Connector two 40 pin Approx 120g mw next page FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions eS Notes 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications e With a periodical interrupt function 1ms it is possible to read an on pulse input signal with a minimum pulse width of 0 4ms For detailed information about the on pulse catch input func tion section 2 11 5 Keep the number of input and output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as de termined by the input voltage and ambient temperature Input Outp 32 30 24V DC Number of points per com ee ea mon which are simultaneous 18 18 ii aii Sa on 26 4V DC 38 47 55 100 4 116 6 131 Ambient temperature C F The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit Adjust the load current referring to the following range 100 Max load current mA 4 75 10 2 26 4 Power supply for driving internal circuit V Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications Internal
156. d in the PLC Configuration dialog box the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed To change the value and setting status write in the new value and or select the setting status 4 To register these settings choose OK Precautions for system register setting System register settings are effective from the time they are set However input settings tool portico port and modem connection settings become effective when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN With regard to the modem connection setting when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN the controller sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception When the initialized operation is performed all set system register values parameters will be initialized 11 1 1 Table of System Registers for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Allocation of user memory system registers 0 1 and 2 Available PLC FP2 The configuration of user memory of FP2 is as follows Area for system 512 words registers fixed A set using system register 0 Area for sequence program Area for macnine B Users memory capacity language program set using system register 1 Area for C configuration set using system register 2 Area for file registers Be sure to set the A using system register 0 B using system register 1 and C using system register 2 as even numbers The area remaining in A after 512 words are
157. data of a fol i tc D 5 f he A Gives the absolute value of the data of 3 lolo D 1 D on Aa Extends the 16 bits of data in D to 32 bits in D 1 D 3 0 D Decodes part of the data of S and stores 7 fa E3 it in D The part is specified by n S D Converts the data of S for use in a 7 segment display and stores it in D 1 S n u V T U o N Oo O N 11 66 I as W A Boe Ope Description A ad TE N fa ma F94 16 bit data distribute DIST S n Each of the digits of the data of S P94 PDIST D are stored in distributed to the least significant digits of the areas beginning at D S D Twelve characters of the character Character gt ASCII code PASC constants of S are converted to ASCII code and stored in D to D 5 F96 16 bit table data S1 The data of S1 is searched for in P96 search PSRC S2 the areas in the range S2 to S3 S3 and the result is stored in DT9037 and DT9038 DSRC S1 The data of S1 1 S1 is searched PDSRC S2 for in the 32 bit data designated by s3 S3 beginning from S2 and the result if stored in DT90037 and DT90038 F97 P97 32 bit table data search B i C dp gt J w O Data shift instructions Data table shift out and compress CMPR D1 Transfer D2 to D3 Any parts of PCMPR D2 the data between D1 and D2 that D3
158. e PXOR OR 16 bit data exclusive S3 R9OOB on S141 S1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on 1 S2 Compares the two blocks beginning with 3 S2 and S3 to see if they are equal Description rand S1 S2 D S1 AND S2 9 D S1 S2 D S1 OR S2 gt D S1 S2 D S1 AND S2 OR S1 AND S2 9 D P67 F68 S1 AND S2 OR S1 AND S2 D P68 XNR PXNR 1 2 D N NOR F69 16 bit data WUNI S1 S2 ro P69 unite PWUNI S3 D S1 AND S3 OR S2 AND S3 D When S3 is HO S2 gt D When S3 is HEFFF S1 gt D Data conversion instructions Block check BCC code PBCC calculation S1 S2 3 D Creates the code for checking the data specified by S2 and S3 and stores it in D The calculation method is specified by S1 Converts the hexadecimal data specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example HABCD gt H 42 41 44 43 P70 F71 P71 HEXA PHEXA Hexadecima S1 S2 D data gt ASCII code F72 P72 ASCII code Hexadeci mal data AHEX PAHEX S1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to hexadecimal data and stores it in D Example H 44 43 42 41 HCDAB DC BA BCDA PBCDA F73 P73 4 digit BCD data gt ASCII code S1 S2 D Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by S1 and
159. e again I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 1 Fundamentals of I O Allocation 3 1 1 3 How to Count the I O Numbers and Express the Occupied Points How to count the I O numbers relay numbers Since I O number are handled in units of 16 points they are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below Heei Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 How to express the occupied points In the programming tool and this manual the occupied points are expressed in the fol lowing fashion for convenience Occupied I O points 16 32 64 128 Type of unit Nil I O unit S Intelligent unit Type of I O X Input Y Output E without I Os FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 1 Fundamentals of I O Allocation 3 1 2 Table of Occupied I O Points by Unit meme Panini repaint oeeupied stot I O point occupied slot CPU Sandara ype je S S NIN FP2SH CPU Remote I O Slave Unit 16 point type DC input 32 point type DC input 32X 64 point type DC input 64X 16 point type relay output 6 point type relay output 16 point type transistor NPN FP2 Y16T output 16 point type transistor PNP FP2 Y16P 1 output 32 point type transistor NPN FP2 Y32T 32 output 32 point type transistor PNP FP2 Y32P 32 output 64 point type transistor NPN FP2 Y64T 64 output 4 64 point type transistor PNP FP2 Y64P 6 output I O mixed unit 32 point type DC input 32 point FP2 XY64D2T type transistor NPN ou
160. e backup battery for the FP2SH CPU is the Part number AFP8801 battery with a connector The Part number AFC8801 battery for the FP2 CPU cannot be used The calendar timer and comment memories have been installed in advance These have already been installed in the FP2SH CPU and no optional units are needed ROM operation functions in the FP2SH CPUs that support IC memory cards FP2 C2P and FP2 C3P have an internal FROM used as a program memory The internal FROM cannot be replaced Software Compatibility The FP2SH has a higher level of compatibility than the FP2 so there are no functions that cannot be used with the FP2SH Other factors such as the number of device points should be confirmed by checking the specifications comparison table on the previous page xiii Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH IC memory cards for the FP2SH The existing model number becomes the one to be discontinued because of the termination of manufacturing IC memory cards by the parts manufacturer When placing a new order specify the new product number Termination of Production Type Memory capacity Model No Battery type AIC52000 Internal secondary battery Rechargeable type New product Type Memory capacity Model No Battery type Lithium Battery Interchangeable type jae Notes For AFP2209 An interchangeable lithium battery is used When you use for the first time install the battery included For AlC5200
161. e bottom of the STATUS DISPLAY window you can find the error code SLF DIAGN ERR CD 45 OPERATION ERROR Error code Comments Procedure 3 Error code is 1 to 9 Condition There is a syntax error in the program Operation 1 Change to PROG mode and clear the error Operation 2 Execute a total check function using programming tool software FPWIN GR to deter mine the location of the syntax error mw next page Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting FP2 FP2SH 8 2 Troubleshooting Error code is 20 or higher Condition A self diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred Operation Use the programming tool in PROG mode to clear the error Using programming tool software FPWIN GR Click Clear Error button in the Status Display menu described on the previous page Error code 43 and higher can be cleared In the PROG mode the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR P148 PERR When an operation error error code 45 occurs the address at which the error occurred is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 If this happens monitor the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the error FP2 FP2SH Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting
162. e contents of ROM are copied to the internal RAM FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 4 Writing to ROM 6 4 Writing to ROM 6 4 1 Writing to EPROM Using Programming Tool Software This method entails using programming tool software at the computer to send the program directly to any commercially available ROM writer and writing the data to the ROM Preparation Connect the commercially available ROM writer to the computer Attach the optional memory EPROM FP2 EM5 in the commercially available ROM writer Read the program with programming tool software Commercially available ROM writer Procedure 1 On the Option menu select Communication Set tings and set the transmission speed and communication format that matched that for the ROM writer 2 On the Tool menu select ROM Writer Sipe Mer bef oo hitless x Operation Method f Read inibe Close npulDutout Destination Setial Poet Fie Hep M Set Passord White Data 3 Select Write and Serial Port and click Execute but ton The program is copied to the ROM writer FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 4 Writing to ROM Write the data to the optional memory EPROM FP2 EM5 with the commercially available ROM writer The specification of commercially available ROM writer set to EPROM M27C1001 12F1 or equivalent SGS THOMSON MICROELECTRONICS FP2 FP2SH
163. e installation screws and further secure the unit to the backplane For the 2 modules type unit there are two installation screws 2 modules type unit PAA Unit installation screw Tightening 1 0 to 1 2 N m 4 9 Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 1 Installation Removing the unit Procedure 1 Loosen the installation screws 2 modules type unit gt Pull out the retaining hook at the bottom of the unit with the tip of a flat headed screwdriver and remove the unit as illustrated below Retaining hook 4 10 FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 1 Installation 4 1 3 Connecting Expansion Cable Attaching Connectors Make sure that the expansion cable is firmly connected Do not subject the expansion cable to any twisting or stress Connect the expansion cable so that the ferrite core of the expansion cable is situated in close proximity to CPU backplane FP2 backplane One backplane can be added on for expansion CPU backplane Expansion backplane 4 11 Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 1 Installation FP2 backplane H type Three expansion backplanes H type can be added on for expansion Connect a cable from the connector of the basic backplane to the outside connector of the expansion backplane with the smallest number and then con
164. e keeping the mode selector in the RUN position If the same error occurs after this please contact your dealer Abnormality was detected when the multi CPU system was used Please contact your dealer The voltage of the backup battery for the IC memory card lowered The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The voltage of the backup battery for IC memory card lowers The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The IC memory card installed is not compatible Replace the IC memory card compatible with FP2SH FP10SH MEW NET W2 MCU The MEWNET W2 link unit or MCU Multi communication unit is not installed in the slot specified using the configuration data Either install a unit in the specified slot or change the parameter The error specified by the F148 ERR P148 PERR instruction is occurred gt Take steps to clear the error condition according to the specification you chose A Available 11 4 3 Table of MEWTOCOL COM Communication Error Description NACK error Link system error WACK error Link system error Unit No overlap Link system error Transmission format error Link unit hardware Link system error error Link system error 127 Link system error Link system error Link system error L
165. ea setting All non hold type All hold type Internal relay WRO to WR199 WRO to WR499 Hold type 53 words Hold type 387 words Link register for MEWNET W All hold type Index register All hold type All non hold type All hold type Non hold type 500 words WRO to WR499 Internal relay Hold type 387 words WR500 to WR886 All hold type MEWNET W PC link setting For PC link W 0 System registers 40 to 45 For PC link W 1 System registers 50 to 55 Regarding the link relays and link data registers specify the range for communication and divide it up for sending and receiving Starting No Receiving for sending area Range for sending Range for communication Receiving area The default settings have the range for communication system registers 40 41 50 and 51 set to 0 so that PC link communication is not possible If the range for sending system registers 43 45 53 and 55 is set to 0 the range for communication will all be for receiving The link relay and link data register ranges not used for communication can each be used as internal relays and data registers Table of system registers for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Available PLC FP2 sting on a capacity Enabled When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is issued and the ERROR LED lights BATT LED lights Battery error alarm Enabled Disabled When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is no
166. eads the program of the IC memory card and transfers the program to the internal RAM of the CPU The target of automatic reading is the program named Autoexec spg Procedure 1 While the power is turned off set the DIP switches SW2 and SW4 on the back of the CPU to on and set the IC memory card access enable switch to on position Spree 7 ERROR RUN Sere A OALARM 4 Proa rat 00000 0000 2 Turn on the CPU 7 18 FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 3 For Use as Program Memory Method 2 Use the programming tool to read the program of the IC memory card and directly transfer it into the internal RAM of the CPU With simple operation of the programming tool reads the program saved on the IC memory card and transfer it to the internal RAM of the CPU The target of automatic reading is the program named Autoexec spg Procedure 1 Booting the ROM amp RAM service function On the Tool menu select ROM amp RAM service bof View f RO Wa RAM service The ROM amp RAM Service window opens ROM amp RAM Service Untitie Fa 2 Executing the ROM gt RAM transfer function Select ROM RAM and click on the Execute but ton 7 19 IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 3 For Use as Program Memory Method 3 Use the Upload Program from IC Card of the FPWIN GR and select one of the programs saved in the IC memory card
167. ecautions xiv IC memory cards for the FP2SH XV Compatibility of FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH and Precautions xvi Programming Tool Restrictions 085 xvii Chapter1 Overview 1 1 System Configuration sssaaa aaaeeeaa eee eee eens 1 3 1 1 1 Basic Configuration by Number of Slots 05 1 3 1 1 2 Expansion of Backplane 0 0 ccc eee 1 5 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations 0 0 cc eens 1 8 1 2 1 Line Up of Backplanes and Units 0 0 0 cece eee 1 8 1 2 2 Combinations That Can be Used and Restrictions 1 10 1 2 2 1 Restrictions on Unit Types 00 eee 1 10 1 2 2 2 Limitations on Current Consumption 1 12 123 Expansion FUNCHON aitesciv lt ntieenacratibeten titade veo atee ee eeu 1 15 1 3 1 Computer LINK ik ceciackestussekeceeiede setdenbubeness 1 15 1 3 2 Connection of MODEM 00 0 ccs 1 17 L4 Programming O0lS 204 lt ca den ases beret ianet ats ate eerste EE 1 19 1 4 1 Tools Needed for Programming 000 cece eens 1 19 1 4 2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable 1 20 1 4 3 Tools Needed for ROM Creating 0 000 c eee ee 1 21 Chapter 2 Parts and Functions 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable 0 0c ccc eens 2 3 2 1 1 BACK DIAN Cjanucee cites herd ens foe eek econ ese kon need eee 2 3 2 1 2 Basic Backplane H Type
168. ed Ae Remote mode flag Turns on while the mode selector is set to REMOTE Meee Break clear fl T hen the break ion is cl d Note reak Clear flag urns on when the break operation Is cleared R9029 F reinati Turns on during forced on off operation for I O relay and Note g Nag timer counter contacts External interrupt enable flag Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by R902A Available PLC the ICTL instruction Note FP2SH FP10SH Interrupt flag Turns on while the periodical interrupt is executed by the Available PLC FP2 ICTL instruction im Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs R902C Turns off during instructed sampling Sampling point flag Turns on while sampling is triggered by the periodical sani interrupt jit amping Hace ene Turns on when the sampling trace ends Note flag R902E Sampling trigger flag Turns on when the sampling trace trigger of the F156 Note STRG P156 PSTGR instruction is turned on R902F Note Note Used by the system Sampling enable flag Turns on when the starting point of sampling is specified 11 20 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name _ Cs i Scriptom Monitors if CPU is in the F145 SEND P145 PSEND and F145 SEND P145 F146 RECV P146 PRECV instructions executable PSEND and F146 condition as follows RECV P146 PRECV off None of the above mentioned instructions can be Instruction executing e
169. ed A 5 module type backplane cannot be added on for expansion Only one backplane can be added on for expansion A power supply unit is also necessary on an expansion back plane mw next page 1 5 Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 1 System Configuration Do not install a CPU on an expansion backplane There is no need to make the number of modules on the ex pansion backplane equal to the number of modules on the CPU backplane FP2 backplane H type CPU unit Power supply unit Backup battery i cs Expansion memory I O unit Basic backplane iil il iil iil ml a Eh be x aje Sa A we ira Expansion cable nw SERS ooo N DECCAN ooo Board No ig switches cE The basic FP2 backplane H type that the CPU unit can be installed and the expansion backplane H type that only the I O units and the intelligent I O units can be installed are available A maximum of eight I O units including the unit built in the CPU can be controlled per backplane Even if further I O units are installed they are not recognized Up to three expansion backplanes can be added on for expansion Use the board No setting switches on the board to distinguish the expansion back plane A power supply unit is also necessary on an expansion backplane FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 1 System Configuration Restriction on the number of modules of the backplane For expansion back plane The num
170. ed in order for this setting to be effective Procedure 1 On the Option menu select PLC Configuration 2 Select Initial Switch tab heime ee Eni Tire tink O irii Tost Port Coe Port Fermata 1C ear tan hiai Gei ni ida e Kod cms Peep Garin epee Cina Sy rated Sveti bet riera Poel A e Das Mapil T re Fap _ bwe E br Hiili FP Link Aegi eh Ayer i Het E L 1 CoV E P lesba Sige Msi ding H hk he vies ee CP Dama d anie peabki yen cece dr re 3 Check Alarm battery error off FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 2 FP2 RAM Operation 6 2 FP2 RAM Operation 6 2 1 RAM Operation Method Verify that the operation condition switches DIP switches on the back of the FP2 CPU are set for RAM operation SW2 off FP2 CPU rear side ee en ee off RAM operation on ROM operation The CPU is set at the factory for RAM operation 6 2 2 Precautions When Operating the RAM The contents written to RAM are all saved by the backup battery Therefore it is impor tant to be aware of the life of the backup battery ame Note Using programming tool software be sure to copy the program in RAM to the hard disk of the host computer or to a floppy disk FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 3 FP2 ROM Operation 6 3 FP2 ROM Operation 6 3 1 ROM Operation Method Preparation Turn off the power supply and remove the CPU from the
171. ed using programming tool software NPST GR FPWIN GR PLC Configuration System register Setting Menu of FPWIN GR Software 1 On the Option menu select PLC Configuration 2 Inthe PLC Configuration Screen select Action on Er ror tab oon Item Description DUPLICATE OUTPUT DISE ENAB I O UNIT ERROR ISTOP CONT INTELLIGENT UNIT ERROR ISTOP CONT I O VERIFY ERROR ISTOP CONT UNUSED UNUSED OPERATION ERROR STOP CONT REMOTE I O SLAVE LINK ERROR STOP CONT I O ERROR IN REMOTE I O SLAVE STOP CONT UNUSED BATTERY ERROR INDICATION ENAB DISA INDEX MODIFIER CHECK ENAB DISA Allowing duplicated output When you set the system register 20 to ENAB duplicated output is not regarded as an error and the PLC continues to operate Continuing after an operation error When you set the system register 26 to CONT even if the PLC continues to operate this is regarded as an error This applies to system registers 21 through 28 as well FP2 FP2SH Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 1 If the ERROR LED Lights Condition The self diagnostic error occurs Procedure 1 Replace the backup battery of the CPU when the BATT LED is on section 9 1 1 Procedure 2 Check the error code using the programming tool Using programming tool software FPWIN GR In the ONLINE mode select Status Display on the Online menu At th
172. edure refer to the operation manual that came with the computer Procedure Until Operation FP2 FP2SH 5 2 Programming with Programming Tool Software 5 2 2 Configuration of Programming Tool Software Depending on the PLC type and conditions of use it is necessary to set the basic configuration for programming tool software Be sure to set these parameters of con figration before beginning programming 5 2 2 1 Parameters and Setting Methods Select PLC type Select the PLC type that is being used select FLO Tipe FP SIGMA FPO CILCIECIE 12 FPO CISL FOF FPO TH 1 FFT Ll4 iis DoF FFI Oa g gt FF FFI C5672 5 0 FP 4 CBT 0 Se FRA C a FFH 5 0 FF i Esp Curent Setia Expansion memory unit used Selection FPasHePUye O O eo After your selection you can change the PLC type FP2 FP2SH Procedure Until Operation 5 2 Programming with Programming Tool Software Communication Settings Select the Network type or communication format In case if RS232C Baud rate PLC default 9600 bps Harj isle m0 hga Daa length Data length ee PLC default 8 bits Shop ba E Tihi F zii Stop bit Paty 3 PLC default 1 bit SS A SS Parity PLC default Odd Tiit p ome D Pananein for audomagbee setirgj E cael rae F Cate Length fe Pui lt hare P Une ET LAM imi SECTS Ce aan Witr mato reread rh ME a __ te Par Me oF 40
173. ee ees 3 18 3 6 2 Differences Due to Allocation Methods 0 3 18 3 6 2 1 When Arbitrary Allocation is Used 3 18 3 6 2 2 When I O Mount Allocation is Used 3 20 3 6 2 3 When Automatic Allocation is Used 3 21 Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 Mstalatom syseeetn ete ts aaee a a E e e E 4 3 4 1 1 Installation Space and Environment 0000 ee eee 4 3 4 1 2 Mounting Method 224 stow ore anaana tae heh owes eee See 4 6 4 1 2 1 Backplane esc tksceetwetieagiadsed eTe e a 4 6 4 1 2 2 UNIS crtec acest ope k ce toda tes Meee ns eeemee se OREEE 4 8 4 1 3 Connecting Expansion Cable 0 cee ees 4 11 4 1 4 Preparing the Backup Battery 0 cc eee eee 4 13 Power Supply Wiring 00 cece eee eee eee eens 4 15 4 2 1 Wiring of Power Supply 2 c cents 4 15 da2 AAROUNICUING sides scene cere cceneic cetae deena a oe ce e a 4 17 Wing InpuULAanG OUIDUL tsetse dig ehe tir ied Vandi eke chee bets aces 4 18 4 3 1 MPU die Reeemenre a meee ates are ttear arte a eee ree ate arena ae Wee er ee 4 18 432 OUMDUL WINING 2 2 cc8eeeeinelenkieueskseeeoeeed eee ieets 4 21 4 3 3 Cautions Regarding Units 00 4 22 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units 0 cee eee 4 23 4 4 1 Wiring the Connector Type Units 000 cece 4 23 4 4 2 Connecting with Connector for Wire pressed Terminal Cab
174. efficiency mw next page 3 18 FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 6 1 O Numbers of Free Slots Example of pre assigning I O numbers for a 64 point type input unit to a free slot pti fe Se eS ae 16 point type 64 point input 16 point type CPU DC input unit reserved _ __ transistor output unit backplane oe EEE J La a SS ey o Gx u Sn NEN XO X10 X20 Y60 Y70 to to to to to XF X1F X5F Y6F Y7F Expansion backplane S m ses See See eee eee eee ERE O ae ae ha z est i a IZZ Mec ___ oe Us es ee a a kee iy Y80 Y90 Y100 Y110 Y120 to to to to to Y8F YOF Y1OF YF Y12F 16 point type 64 point relay output unit type DC input unit UY jeeeeeq 3 19 I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 6 I O Numbers of Free Slots 3 6 2 2 When I O Mount Allocation is Used When I O mount allocation is executed 16 points are uniformly assigned to each free slot Advantage When the I O unit that occupy 16 points is added there is no need to worry about I O number discrepancies 16 points are assigned to free modules free slots 16 point type 16 point type CPU DC input unit transistor output unit backplane I Slot No J Slots that do not actually exist
175. emote Max 8 192 points using S LINK or MEWNET F system I O system Program Internal memory FP2 C2 FP2 C2P approx 60K steps capacity FP2 C8P approx 120K steps Using expansion memory unit Number of Basic 95 types instructions instructions High level 434 types instructions Operation Basic From 0 03us per instruction speed instructions yey High level From 0 06us per instruction instructions Operation External input 8 192 points Note 1 memory relays X ull fer External output 8 192 points y relays Y Internal relays 14 192 points Note 2 R Timer counter Total 3 072 points Note 2 T C Timer units of ims 10ms 100ms and 1s Note 1 counts up to 32 767 x each unit Counter 1 to 32 767 counts Link relays L 10 240 points Notes 2 and 3 Pulse relays P 2 048 points Note 2 Alarm relays E 2 048 points Note 2 Operation Data registers 10 240 words Note 2 memory DT abn File registers FP2 C2L 32 765 words areas FL FP2 C2 FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 32 765 words x 3 banks Note 2 Link data 8 448 words Notes 2 and 4 registers LD Timer counter 3 072 words set value area SV Timer counter 3 072 words elapsed value area EV Index registers 14 words x 16 banks I0 to ID 10 8 FP2 FP2SH Specifications Differential points Auxiliary timer Shift register Master control relay points MCR Number of labels JP and LOOP
176. en to the IC memory card When the card is used in this way the IC memory card can be used as an expanded memory area that lets data be written and read using the sequence program Data is written using the F13 ICWT instruction of the sequence program and is read from the IC memory card using the F12 ICRD instruction The FROM type of card can only be used for reading data How the IC memory card is used Program memory area Power on automatic operation S Pa a RAM ROM transmission Program memory ee a m ROM RAM transmissio NOITE ANI Expanded data N memory N Expanded memory area IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 2 Formatting and Erasing 7 2 Formatting and Erasing 7 2 1 Program Memory Field and Expanded Memory Field The area in which sequence programs are stored is called the program field and the area used to expand the data memory is called the expanded memory field The IC memory card must be divided into separate fields depending on how it is being used Using the Card Only as a Program Memory When using the card only to save programs the entire IC memory card must be desig nated as a program memory field FROM type Procedure 1 On the Tool menu choose IC Card Service and then Erase IC Card to erase the entire field 2 On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Copy File to IC Card and set the format size to the m
177. ere may be a problem with the installed ROM ROM is not installed ROM contents are damaged Program size stored on the ROM is larger than the capacity of the ROM Check the contents of the ROM Units installed exceed the limitations i e 4 or Unit more link units E27 installation Stops A A A A AIA error gt Turn off the power and re configure units referring to the hardware manual System fares an abnormality in the system register Stops S9 S s A Check the system register setting or error rma initialize the system registers 1 This error occurs on FP X Ver2 0 or later A Available P X 11 86 Opera tion status Oo ma Configu ration A parameter error was detected in the Stops MEWNET W2 configuration area Set a parameter correct parameter E Interrupt Probably a hardware abnormality error 0 gt Please contact your dealer Description and steps to take An interrupt occurred without an interrupt Interrupt request A hardware problem or error due to Stops noise is possible error 1 gt Turn off the power and check the noise conditions There is no interrupt program for an interrupt hich occurred Interrupt si Stops Check the number of the interrupt program error and change it to agree with the interrupt request Multi CPU CPU2 This error occurs when a FP3 FP10SH is used as CPU2 for a multi CPU system unmatch Stops Refer to Multi CP
178. ered ia is transferred to RAM and then execut Memory contents Program Hold type data of operation memory The pro backed up by System registers gram and the system register within ROM are battery Hold type data of operation memory saved without battery Maintenance Replacement of backup battery is vital If program does not use hold type data of op eration memory then operation without a backup battery is possible FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 1 FP2 Operation 6 1 1 2 Retaining the Data During Power Outages For the operation memory such as that for internal relays and data registers the data that is set as hold type memory is backed up by the backup battery ree Note If the internal relays and data registers are set to be non hold type then they will not be saved Battery less operation During ROM operation if it is not necessary to retain the internal relays and data regis ters then you can set them all to non hold type and perform operation without a backup battery 6 1 1 3 Setting the Battery Error Warnings Under normal conditions if an error occurs with the backup battery the BATT and ER ROR LEDs on the front of the CPU are on for battery error warning With ROM operation that does not require the backup battery for operation memory it is possible to set it so that this warning is not given With this setting the BATT and ERROR LEDs do not light Method The programming tool software is requir
179. ering of I O Allocation 3 3 3 1 1 3 How to Count the I O Numbers and Express the OGCCUDICD POIS sg x wicaredeaissind EERE ea Seca m aaa 3 4 3 1 2 Table of Occupied I O Points by Unit 0005 3 5 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation 0 ccc eee ne 3 7 3 2 1 Using Arbitrary Allocation 0 0 c ce ees 3 7 FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 2 2 Allocation Example of CPU Backplane 05 3 7 3 2 3 Allocation Example of Expansion Backplane 3 10 3 2 3 1 When Using FP2 Backplane 005 3 10 3 2 3 2 When Using FP2 Backplane H Type 3 11 VO WOURUAIIGECAUOM cit 2 25 seca Ae Games a a eu A ede 3 13 3 3 1 Using I O Mount Allocation 0 0 cece 3 13 3 3 1 1 Example of I O Mount Allocation 3 13 3 3 1 2 Procedure for I O Mount Allocation 3 14 AULOMAUC ANOCALON 214 ctecoert deka car denigiiod dhe odteedewe need 3 15 3 4 1 Using Automatic Allocation 0 0 eee 3 15 3 4 1 1 Example of Automatic Allocation 3 15 3 4 1 2 Procedure for Automatic Allocation 3 16 Procedure for Clearing Registered Content 00 eee eae 3 17 3 5 1 Meaning of Clearing Registered Content 6 3 17 3 5 2 Clearing Content Using Programming Tool Software 3 17 I O Numbers of Free SlotS 00 00 cee 3 18 3 6 1 I O Numbers of Free Slots 0 c
180. ersion PLINE D are stored in bits 0 to 15 of D ee ei ae en cae Binary data gt BTOA S1 Converts multiple binary data to k D E conversion D ASCII gt binary ATOB S1 Converts multiple ASCII data to data conversion S2 n multiple binary data x O 4 x x D ASCII data ACHK check F257 P257 SCMP S1 These instructions compare two specified character strings and op NO strings output the judgment results to a special internal relay F258 S1 These instructions couple one P258 coupling S2 D character string with another e Number of LEN S D These instructions determine the ofo e characters in a number of characters in a character C O O O O 0 character string string F260 Search for SSRC S1 The specified character is searched S2 D ina character string S1 These instructions retrieve a 2 D specified number of characters from the right side of the character string P260 character string Retrieving data from character strings right side Retrieving data from character strings left side Retrieving a character string from a character string RIGHT LEFT These instructions retrieve a specified number of characters from the left side of the character string S1 S2 D u u These instructions retrieve a character string consisting of a specified number of characters from the specified position in the character string These instruction
181. et 1 024 words 3 072 words 3 072 words value area SV Timer counter elapsed 1 024 words 3 072 words 3 072 words value area EV Index registers 14 words 14 words x 16 banks 14 words x 16 banks IO to ID Comment input function Optional function Built in Internal Optional function function Clock calendar function Optional function Built in Internal Built in Internal function function Optional function ROM operation function FP2 C2L FP2 C2 Optional function Optional function FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Built in Internal function xii FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures Compatibility of FP2SH and FP2 and Precautions Hardware Compatibility Most of the units and related products used with the FP2SH can be used with the FP2 but the following differences should be noted Some optional memory units cannot be used The only memory unit that can be used with the FP2SH CPU FP2 C2 or FP2 C2L is the Part number FP2 EM7 or Model number AFP2208 The FP2 memory units Part numbers FP2 EM1 FP2 EM2 FP2 EM8 and FP2 EM6 cannot be used The types of optional ROMs are different The only ROM that can be used with the FP2SH CPU unit FP2 C2 is the Model number AFP5208 or AFP5209 The nonvolatile memory implemented memory unit Model number AFP2208 can be also used The FP2 ROM Part number AFP2204 and Part number AFP2205 cannot be used The backup battery types are different Th
182. evices 5 Tool port RS232C is used to connect a programming tool 6 Input indicators 32 points Indicate the input on off states 7 Selector for input indicators switch between the first 32 points and second 32 points of the 64 points input LED display Input connectors CN1 XO to X1F CN2 X20 to X3F 9 Operation condition switches page 2 10 are used to set the baud rate of the programming tool to select the program memory and to select the writing operation for the program memory m next page 2 12 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 2 FP2CPU Memory backup battery for backup of the internal memory RAM Part number AFC8801 CR2450 or equivalent i Note The settings of the operation condition switches become active when the power is turned on CPU with 64 Points Input Specifications mem SCSCS SCSCSC S Description SSCS Response time rs lt lt Input points per common 32 points per common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit wnen on switching External connection method Two 40 pin connectors igs Note Keep the number of input points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the input voltage and ambient temperature Number of 7 ae eee ee ee eee ae points which are simultaneously on 50 55 122 131 Ambient temperature C F 2 13
183. g the applicable pressure connection crimp terminals and wiring refer to section 4 5 1 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 2 6 point Type Relay Output Unit Specifications Part number FP2 Y6R Insulation method Optical coupler Rated control capacity 5A 250V AC 10A common 5A 30V DC 10A common Note Min load 100mA 10V resistor load Response time Electrical 100 000 operations ormore SSS Internal current consumption 50mA or less at 5V DC Common method Output points per 2 points common common Operating indicator 6 dot LED display lit when on External connection method Terminal block M 3 screw Approx 170g gt Note For each common 1 pin use at a current capacity of 5A or less Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Output indicator LED Pin Layout m rs a Op 250V AC 5A 4h 4 30V DC 5A O E PED Op 250V AC 5A Jp 30V DC SAN Wi O a ree Cas 250V AC 5A 30V DC 5A 1 24V DC i Max For more information regarding the applicable pressure connection crimp terminals and wiring refer to section 4 5 1 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 3 16 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit Specifications Part number insulation method Rated load voltage Load voltage range Maximum load current 0
184. g the battery within 10 minutes Procedure for FP2 1 Use an insulated flat head screwdriver and lift up the battery During this operation be careful not to damage printed circuit board battery holder or other internal compo nents 2 Pull out the battery in the direction shown by the arrows below pushing from the rear 3 Holding the positive pole of the battery upwards press the new battery into the battery holder underneath the terminal FP2 FP2SH Maintenance 9 1 Replacement of Spare Parts Procedure for FP2SH 1 Lift up the lead wire Make sure the lead wire next to the connector insertion area which is also the battery holder is lifted out of the hole that secures it in place 2 Lift up the battery 3 Pull the connector straight off so the terminals do not bend 4 Install the new battery by reversing the above proce dure Make sure the connector terminals are positioned in the correct directions Maintenance FP2 FP2SH 9 1 Replacement of Spare Parts Procedure for AFP2209 Preparation Backup the data saved in the IC memory card Note The saved data is overwritten when replacing the battery 1 Move to the lock switch to the RELEASE position to ward the battery holder RELEASE position Lock switch a 2 Remove the battery holder 3 Place the battery in the battery holder with the side with a sign facing up
185. gins a logic operation only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Connects a Form A normally open contact serially only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Connects a Form A normally open contact serially only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for one scan when leading edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for one scan when trailing edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Inverts the output condition on off each time the leading edge of the trigger is detected 1 Connects the multiple instruction blocks serially Connects the multiple instruction blocks in T parallel O O Available Not JE K Not available partially z The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later 3 In the FP2 FP2SH 10SH when using X1280 Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 T256 C256 or anything beyond for the ST ST OT AN AN OR and OR instruction
186. he backplane on the slave station system the time taken from the startup until the completion of positioning should be longer than a scan time 8 With the backplane on the slave station system I O points cannot be set including 96 input points and 96 output points 1 11 Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations 1 2 2 2 Limitations on Current Consumption Power supply unit Rated current at 5V Internal supply power 5V ETE en passes through the bus of Zz 9 the backplane to each unit FP2 PSA2 a a FP2 PSD2 nn ns y v O an a YR Ip C E DOA By xP A MP A EA A CD Eo C3 Co Clie SAE f a A 00000 A op YY a000 j gt Se Commercially available power supply 24V Power goes from a commercially available power supply to each I O unit Internal supply power 5V DC The 5V DC power used for driving the internal circuit of each unit is supplied from the power supply unit through the internal bus of the backplane External supply power 24V DC The 24V DC power supply used as the input power supply of the input units and the output
187. he basic 1 module size and the 2 module size that Is twice as wide The 1 module unit is the size that physically takes up the space of one guide on the backplane The 2 module unit is the size that physically takes up the space of two guides on the backplane 1 module unit 2 module unit Backplane Selection Following two kinds of backplanes are available 1 FP2 backplane AFP25 Color of letters on the printed board White 2 FP2 backplane H type AFP25 H Color of letters on the printed board Yellow These two backplanes cannot be used in combination Carefully select the type of backplanes before you order The selection of the backplane should be based on the total number of modules to be used in the system In other words the module number of the backplane must be greater than or equal to the total number of modules for the system So be sure to select a backplane that allows the installation of all the required units Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH When using the FP3 FP10SH or Other Units Backplane slot number The backplane for the FP2 is specified by the total number of slots i e 14 module type including the connectors for the power supply unit and CPU The number of connectors or slots remaining for the I O units and intelligent units is then the module number of the backplane minus the number of modules for the power supply unit and CPU Similarly the number of connectors or slots rema
188. he data register of the CPU to the IC memory card F0 MV K 100 DT9Q F13 ICWT DT 9 K1 H3FFFF With the above program after the constant K100 is stored in DT9 F13 ICWT instruction is used to write one word of data K100 from the beginning of DT9 to the address H3FFFF of the IC memory card For more details refer to the programming manual With the FROM type the Data Editor is used to write programs IC memory card Read from DT9 H 3FFFF Reading Use the F12 ICRD instruction to transfer the word data stored on the IC memory card to the data register of the CPU i H F12 ICRD H3FFFF K1 DT7 The above program reads a one word data from the address H3FFFF of the IC memory card to DT7 For more details refer to the programming manual IC memory card One word data H 3FFFF FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 4 For Use as Expansion Memory 2 When dealing with many different data or other such applications you can create a table to store the different control data and easily switch between the data ac cording to the data type you are using IC memory card Create a data table in the IC memory card such as outlined above so that the data is read to the CPU every time you switch data When using the IC memory card as an expanded memory the DIP switches do not need to be set but the access enable switch should be set to on Configuration of Expanded Memor
189. he given data table F283 Scaling of DSCAL S1 The output value Y is found for the P283 32 bit data PDSCAL S2 D input value X by performing scaling 10 for the given data table F284 Inclination S1 Executes the linear output for the P284 output of 16 bit S2 specified time from the specified 10 x data S3 D initial value to the target value 0 Integer type non linear function instructions F285 Upper and LIMT S1 When S1 gt 83 S1 D P285 lower limit PLIMT S2 When 1 lt S3 S2 D control S3 D When S1 lt or S8 lt or S2 S3 gt D 16 bit data O Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is only available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later 11 76 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH ae F286 Upper and DLIMT 1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S34 1 S3 S1 1 P286 lower limit PDLIMT 3 D 1 D 1 D control When S2 1 ge S341 S3 S2 1 32 bit data S2 D 1 D When 1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 S3 1 S3 D 1 D F287 Deadband BAND S1 S2 When S1 gt S3 S38 S1 D P287 control PBAND S3 D When S2 lt S3 S3 S2 D 16 bit data When S1 lt or S3 lt or S2 0D F288 Deadband DBAND S1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S34 1 S3 S3 1 P288 control PDBAND S3 D S3 S1 1 1 gt D 1 D 32 bit data When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S3 1
190. he input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input unit Please contact your dealer If the power is not properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormal ity in the input device or input power supply Check the input device and input power supply FP2 FP2SH Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting 8 2 Troubleshooting Check of input condition 2 Input indicator LEDs are on Procedure Monitor the input condition using a programming tool If the input monitored is off there is probably an abnormality with the input unit Please contact your dealer If the input monitored is on check the leakage current at the input devices e g two wire type sensor and check the program again referring the following Check for the duplicated use of output and for the output using the high level instruc tion Check the program flow when a control instruction such as MC or JP is used Check the settings of the I O allocation 8 2 5 If a Communication Error Message Appears Procedure 1 Make sure the computer and PLC are properly connected Procedure 2 Check if the baud rate and data length settings of the PLC and the computer are the same Personal computer section setting 1 On the Option menu select Communication Settings 2 Select a baud rate 9600 or 19200 PLC section setting Use the SW1 of DIP switches operation condition switches to enter the setting for the PL
191. he intelligent units Replace the CPU on the CPU backplane with a remote I O slave unit auejdyoeq wa sAs uo01 8 S BAIS Expansion backplane for slave station system Install in order from the left to the right the power supply unit the I O and the intelligent units Same as the installa tion of the expansion backplane Limitations on Combining Link Units Unit type and mode When CPU unit is FP2 When CPU unit is FP2SH Only one unit See note Can be installed within 5 units in combination Multi wire Link unit Can be installed within 3 units in combination With W link CCU and MCU PC link mode MEWNET W mode with W link CCU and MCU PC link mode Can be installed within 2 units in combination with MCU in PC PLC link mode Multi wire Link unit Up to 3 units can be used Up to 8 units can be used MEWNET W2 mode Up to 2 units out of 3 when including PC Up to 2 units out of 8 when including PC ET LAN unit PLC link PLC link Multi Communication unit Can be installed within 3 units in combination Can be installed within 5 units in combination PC PLC link mode with W link CCU and MCU with W link CCU and MCU Can be installed within 2 units in combination with W link unit in PC PLC link mode Multi Communication unit Up to 8 units can be used Computer link mode MEWNET VE Link Unit Not Available Can be installed within 2 units in combination with Multi Communication Unit ae Note Depending
192. he units and the power supply supplied to the RT 2 relay terminals are the same power supply Correspondence table of RT 2 relay terminal ee O iLL oOo 0 1 y 3 y COM terminal for Y4 to Y7 Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units 4 4 4 Connecting with Flat Cable Connector When connecting with a flat cable connector the relationship between the cable num ber and I O number is shown below Correspondence table of cable number and I O number Examples for the CN1 group Examples for the CN2 group Cable Cable Cable No No z xe vie a pon a pes ve pe ve pea Via pe ve a pa va o pee vie at E vis se a a E E E a a X20 X28 2 X29 X22 X2A X23 X2B 2 8 1 oe a ee A NO oe gt lt N lt N co 2 XA lt N N E N gt lt lt NO N wl gt lt N O Y2C gt lt 2 2 X26 2E X27 X2F Y2F lt N O1 gt lt ol a as N O 4 6 lt N O fi NO m lt NO NJ x x x x com i7 ew com N o x lt AN N aN p E Sas e J e o 1E ea E PE pem pec C cm zZz O Z O O O O O g Z FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units Flat Cable Connection Diagram for the 32 point Type I O Units 64 point Type I O Units and I O Mixed Unit
193. hen the system registers 46 KO PC link O for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 1 for one with a larger slot No When the system registers 46 K1 PC link 1 for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 0 for one with a larger slot No 11 26 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Names Description s R9090 Turns on when unit No 1 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 1 is in the PROG mode Turns on when unit No 2 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 2 is in the PROG mode i 3i he RUN R9092 Turns on when unit No 3 Is in the RUN mode R9093 Turns on when unit No 4 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 4 is in the PROG mode R9091 Turns off when unit No 3 is in the PROG mode Turns on when unit No 5 is in the RUN mode R9094 Turns off when unit No 5 is in the PROG mode apie Turns off when unit No 6 is in the PROG mode R9096 Unit Turns on when unit No 7 Is in the RUN mode MEWNET W P_ No 7 Turns off when unit No 7 is in the PROG mode R9097 PC link Turns on when unit No 8 Is in the RUN mode operation mode Turns off when unit No 8 is in the PROG mode Turns on when unit No 6 is in the RUN mode for PC link 1 Turns off when unit No 9 is in the PROG mode em E RIE R RR e Turns off when unit No 11 is in the PROG mode oo E oraa eames Turns off when unit No 12 is in the PROG mode woo e eaae Sea Turns off when unit No 13 is in the PROG mode oo E Anaa E Re Tu
194. here MEWNET TR 1 on is set in the bit position master unit slot corresponding to the slot number when No 0 to 15 one of the errors below id detected Available PLC Communication error MEWNET TR DT9002 DT90002 FP3 FP10SH master unit Position of When a communication error occurs at abnormal I O the MEWNET TR master unit the bit slot slot No 0 corresponding to the slot no of the unit to 15 will be set on 1 Monitor using binary Available PLC display FP2 FP2SH 1 erroneous MEWNET TR master unit Communication 9 normal A i error of Position of abnormal I O slot MEWNET TR When an error occurs at an I O unit the master unit slot bit corresponding to the slot of the unit No 16 to 31 will be set on 1 Monitor using binary Available PLC display DT9003 DT90003 FP3 FP10SH 1 error 0 normal Position of Bit position J15 21 11 8 7 abnormal O fsuthe healt r slot slot No 16 otsaorse2 i i ti tt to 31 FE Available PLC i FP2 FP2SH orso titi I 11 29 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available FP2 FP3 FP2SH FP10SH Abnormal DT9006 intelligent unit slot No 0 to 15 DT90006 DT90007 I O verify error DT90010 unit slot No 0 to 15 I O verify error DT90011 unit slot No 16 to 31 DT90014 DT90015 DT90016 DT90017 Abnormal intelligent unit slot No 16 to 31 DT9007
195. hich g are simulta 28 i neous on x g 2 4 75 10 2 26 4 32 41 55 Power supply for driving 89 6 105 8 131 internal circuit V Ambient temperature C F Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Output indicator LED 9 1kQ Aa 5 to 24V DC Ls ein ch food ice aaa Pin Layout Output YO to Y1F Output Y20 to Y3F Pin layout of first 32 points Pin layout of last 32 points Left side connector CN1 Right side connector CN2 CN1 CN2 OOHGOOOE OOHOOOOE 5 to 24V DC 5 to 24V DC Although and terminals are connected internally with the same connector It is rec ommended that they also be connected externally For more information regarding the applicable connectors and terminals refer to sec tion 4 4 1 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 8 64 point Type Transistor PNP Output Unit Specifications Maximum surge current On state maximum voltage drop 1 5V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time Internal current consumption 210mA or less at 5V DC Power supply for driving Voltage 4 75 to 26 4V DC internal circuit 270mA or less at 24V DC Common method Output points per 32 points common common Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External connection method Connectors MIL type two 40 pin Approx 120g The load current
196. icating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL COM 11 83 11 4 1 Table of Syntax Check Error Opera tion Description and steps to take status A program with a syntax error has been written Change to PROG mode and correct the error Two or more OT Out instructions and KP Keep instructions are programmed using the same relay Also occurs when using the same timer counter number Duplicated Change to PROG mode and correct the output program so that one relay error is not used for two or more OT instructions Or set the duplicated output to enable in system register 20 A timer counter instruction double definition error will be detected even if double output permission has been selected For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump JP and LBL one instruction is Not paired either missing or in an incorrect position error Change to PROG mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register settings For Parameter example the number setting in a program does mismatch not agree with the timer counter range setting error Change to PROG mode check the system register settings and change so that the settings and the instruction agree An instruction which must be written in a specific area main program area or subprogram area has been written to a different area for example a subroutine SUB to RET
197. igent units in this order 3 Connector for various units Install various unit 4 DIN rail attachment lever allows attachment to a DIN rail 5 Unit installation holes for installing the unit to the backplane Use the screw supplied with the unit for installation 6 Connector for power supply unit 7 Connector for expansion cable for more details regarding the cable connecting refer to section 4 1 3 Connector for CPU unit The position to install the CPU unit is fixed Type of Backplane VESETI a ae A 11 module type Basic system only FP2 BP11MH Approx 470g rae Note The color of letters on the printed board is yellow to make easier to distinguish the FP2 backplane H type from the FP2 backplane Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable 2 1 3 Expansion Backplane H Type FP2 BP EH z eft ae ate J IE analy Gey Parts Terminology and Functions 1 Backplane mounting holes for mounting the backplane to the control panel Use M4 screw for the mounting 2 Unit guides Align the tab on the unit with this guide when installing the unit to the backplane From the left side of the backplane install the power supply unit I O units and intelligent units in this order 3 Connector for various units Install I O unit 4 DIN rail attachment lever allows attachment to a DIN rail 5 Unit installation holes for installing the unit to the backplane Use the screw supplied wi
198. in the d comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 82 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 82 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the m Fe 1 52 Fe gt 51 52 ORF lt gt ORF gt pest 82 5 ORF lt comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Q Available lt Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP X V1 10 or later and FP 32k type 11 61 11 3 Table of High level Instructions The high level instructions are expressed by the prefixes F or P with numbers For most of the high le
199. ing ROM operation turn off the power supply and set DIP switch SW2 to the on position and SW4 to the off position Then turn the power supply on again FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 4 Checking the ROM Contents While Using RAM Operation When the DIP switches on the back of the CPU have been set to the RAM operation side the CPU reads the contents of the internal RAM in that state To check the contents pro grams of the ROM use the procedure described below to send the data to the RAM Preparation Set the CPU in the PROG mode Procedure 1 Select Online Edit Mode on the Online menu bdder Symbol View Online Edit Mode start Monitoring PLO Mode RUN The system goes online and online monitoring begins automatically The icon on the tool bar can also be used to do this 2 Select ROM amp RAM service on the Tool menu ROM amp RAM service The ROM amp RAM Service window opens ROM amp RAM Service Untitie2 Fa 3 The ROM RAM is executed Select ROM gt RAM and click on the Execute button The contents of the ROM are sent to the internal RAM FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 5 Sending Data from the RAM to the FROM The RAM gt ROM Transfer function in the FPWIN GR is used to send programs and data in the CPU to the ROM The data range can be s
200. ing the Connector Type I O Units Correspondence table of 32 point input 32 point output type I O mixed unit When the I O mixed unit is next to the standard type CPU on the right side Examples for the CN1 group Examples for the CN2 group Terminal Terminal number number Terminal Output Terminal Output number number number number AT vo BT pa a Be A3 Y22 B3 Y2A FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units RT 2 Relay Terminal For 64 point type output unit FP2 Y64T you can connect four sets of the RT 2 relay terminals with 16 outputs by using two branch type cable For 32 point type output unit FP2 Y32T and output connector side of I O mixed unit FP2 XY64D2T FP2 XY64D7T you can connect two sets of the RT 2 relay terminals with 16 outputs by using two branch type cable For connecting the terminal to the terminal block use M3 sized pressure connection terminals RT 2 relay terminal connection diagram for 32 point type and 64 point type out put units and I O mixed units Two branch type cable for relay terminal 40 pins 40 pins x 2 RT 2 relay terminal 16 outputs AY232502 or AY232522 The relay terminal that is connected with the shorter cable is the lower I O number ie Note 24V DC should be supplied between the and terminals of the relay terminal Power is supplied to drive the relays of the ter minal itself The I O power supply supplied to t
201. ing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 2 or S141 S1 S24 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 TP reas O a 4 4 aa 1 PEPER 4 4 1 lt S24 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact eee i p 81 82 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the point comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 type real ANFes Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the number comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 data or S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact ie aed serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the AND comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ANF gt Connects a Form A on ally ao contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ANFe Connects a Form A normally open contact ff 5152 4 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S14 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 ANF lt Connects a Form A normally open contact Floating point type real number data compare OR serially by comparing two 32 bit data
202. ining for the I O units on expansion backplanes is the module number of the backplane minus the number of modules for the power supply unit Expansion backplanes 1 FP2 backplane Does not support expansion with 5 module type backplanes Backplanes that are not the 5 module type can be used as expansion backplanes 2 FP2 backplane H type This backplane is functionally equivalent to the backplane for FPS There are the basic backplane H type for installing I O units and the expansion backplane H type for adding I O units more The basic backplane cannot be used as an expansion backplane Removal and Installation of Expansion Memory Unit During removal and installation of expansion memory unit the contents of the internal RAM may be erased so be sure to save a copy of the program and data onto a disk before beginning the operations Use programming tool software NPST GR FPWIN GR for backup purposes Before rewriting the backed up program and data to the programmable controller be sure to clear the program in the programmable controller FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures With the FP2SH Programming Tool Restrictions The following tool software is required in order to program the FP2SH FPWIN GR NPST GR Ver 4 6 or a subsequent version Request Concerning Program Storage To prevent the accidental loss of programs the user should consider the following measures Drafting of documents
203. ink system error Transmission Link system error impossible error Communication stop Link system error No destination error Link system error Other communication Link system error error 140 BCCerron ss A transfer error occurred in the received data 141 Formaterror gt A command was received that does not fit the format 142 No support error A command was received that is not supported eae ee procedure error frames 0 unteesing ror ery celgaing tro varumisonsabons Link setting error ee number Dy designating the transmission station ees eien ee ane time oul error buffer is congested er Transmission processing to another device is not possible Link error unit runaway etc Command process cannot be received because of multiple frame Busy error processing Or cannot be received because command being processed is congested 160 Parameter error Content of specified parameter does not exist or cannot be used There was a mistake in the contact data area data number Data error l l l designation size designation range or format designation Registration over Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded error or when there was no registration PC command that cannot be processed was executed during RUN PC mode error Aade Link system error 11 93 Description An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM IC memory card There may be a problem with
204. install the power supply unit I O units and intelligent units in this order 3 Connector for various units Install a CPU input or output unit When installing a CPU be sure to install it next to a power supply unit 4 DIN rail attachment lever allows attachment to a DIN rail 5 Unit installation holes for installing the unit to the backplane Use the screw supplied with the unit for installation 6 Connector for power supply unit 7 Connector for expansion cable for more details regarding the cable connecting refer to section 4 1 3 This connector is not present on a 5 module type backplane Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable Type of Backplane Type Number of Part module number 5 module type Basic system only 5 FP2 BP05 Approx 1809 180g 7 module type Basic and expansion el FP2 BP07 C a 280g system 9 module type FP2 BP09 Approx 350g 12 module type FP2 BP12 Approx 470g 14 module type FP2 BP14 Approx 530g FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable 2 1 2 Basic Backplane H Type FP2 BP MR Parts Terminology and Functions 4 Backplane mounting holes for mounting the backplane to the control panel Use M4 screw for the mounting 2 Unit guides Align the tab on the unit with this guide when installing the unit to the backplane From the left side of the backplane install the power supply unit CPU I O units and intell
205. ion 3 Mode selector page 2 10 is used to change the operation mode of the PLC 4 COM port RS232C page 2 11 is used to connect a computer or general serial devices 5 Tool port RS232C is used to connect a programming tool 6 Operation condition switches page 2 10 are used to set the baud rate of the programming tool to select the program memory and to select the writing operation for the program memory 7 Memory backup battery for backup of the internal memory RAM Part number AFC8801 CR2450 or equivalent igs Note The settings of the operation condition switches become active when the power is turned on FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 2 FP2 CPU Status Indicator LEDs These LEDs display the current mode of operatin or the occurrence of error LED Description RUN green This lights in the RUN mode to indicate that the program is being executed It flashes during forced input output PROG green This lights in the PROG mode Operation stops while this LED is lighted It flashes when waiting for connection of slave station on remote I O system If the memory is initialized the brightness dims indicating that initialization is being executed TEST green This lights in the test operation mode BREAK green This lights in the operation halts at a break during a test run or halts during the step operation mode for the test run ERROR red This lights if an error is dete
206. ion by comparing two 16 aa bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact f 882 5 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact AND pf 81 825 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact fF 5452 5 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact f7 825 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact f 182 5 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact pf 81 825 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 16 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact in data p Ss parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 compere Connects a Form A normally open contact in OR pt si 2 5 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in pf S182 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally
207. ions 2 9 Input Units Specifications 2 9 2 32 point Type DC Input Unit Specifications mem o Description Response time es H Common method Input points per common 32 points common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on External connection method Connectors MIL type 40 pin Weight Aprox 100g Internal Circuit Diagram AA Internal circuit 3 a ae ea Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 9 Input Units Specifications Pin Layout Input XO to X1F FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 9 Input Units Specifications 2 9 3 64 point Type DC Input Unit Specifications C Response time Internal current consumption at 5V DC 100mA or less Common method Input points per common 32 points common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External connection method Connectors MIL type two 40 pin Approx 120g ie Note Keep the number of input points per common which are simulta neously on within the following range as determined by the input voltage and ambient temperature 64 26 4V DC 24V DC Number of AG EEEE TEE E points per common which are simulta neous on 50 55 127 4 131 Ambient temperature C F Parts and Functions FP2
208. is stored The program capacity is stored in decimal Example K30 approx 30 K steps K60 approx 60 K steps with memory expansion The program capacity is stored in decimal Example K16 approx 16 K steps K15870 K32 approx 32 K steps with memory expansion The maximum last address of the file registers available are stored in here The maximum last address of the file registers available are stored in here 11 31 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available FP2 FP3 DT9022 FP2SH FP10SH DT90022 Scan time DT9023 DT90023 minimum value Scan time DT9024 DT90024 maximum value Mask condition monitoring DT90025 DT90026 register for DT90027 interrupt unit Note Used by the system Scan time current value DT9025 Note initiated interrupts INT 0 to 15 FP2 Not used Mask condition monitoring register for interrupt unit initiated interrupts INT 16 to 23 FP2 Not used DT9026 Note Periodical interrupt interval INT24 DT9027 Note 11 32 Read ing Descriptions The current scan time is stored here Scan time is calculated using the formula Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 Example K50 indicates 5 ms The minimum scan time is stored here Scan time is calculated using the formula Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 Example K50 indicates 5 ms The maxi
209. is turned on IC memory card operation Programs are read using the ROM gt RAM operation of programming tool software Programs are read using the IC Card Service of pro gramming tool software Programs are read using the F14 PGRD instruction of the sequence program FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 6 IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Inserting and Removing the IC Memory Card The IC memory card can be inserted or removed even when the FP2SH power is on To insert or remove the card when the power is on be sure to follow the following proce dure Inserting procedure 1 Remove the cover of FP2SH CPU 2 Setthe IC memory card access enable switch to off position 3 N LLB WME Eject button Se rae Note When using AFP2209 confirm if the battery is installed in the IC memory card Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 6 IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 4 Setthe IC memory card access enable switch to on position oe QERROR RUN Overt ei ye 00000 0000 f O Removal procedure 1 Verify that the IC memory card access LED is off Set the IC memory card access enable switch to off position 2 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 6 IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Precautions when installing rem
210. isplay S3 S4 the FP e i x x x x x registration F181 FP e screen S Specify the screen to be displayed E e e eee OG switching Basic function instruction me BP feet aiaa constant S3 DO the specified input processing F183 Auxiliary DSTM Turn on the specified output and al ial E HH 0 01 s x set value Data transfer instructions mne m ae eee EPERE P190 data move PMV3 S3 DO 53 gt Oz P191 data move PDMV3 S3 DO eS o o D 5 D 4 Logic operation instructions 32 bit data DAND zd S2 o S1 AND S2 1 AND PDAND ot P216 OR PDOR F217 32 bit data DXOR T S2 T S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D F218 32 bit data DXNR S1 S2 S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 OR S2 D 1 D ie Double word pum 830 S1 1 S1 AND S341 S3 OR 32 bit data S3 D S2 1 S2 AND S3 1 unites S3 D 1 D Data conversion instructions Time data gt TMSEC The specified time data a date Pa second jPiwsec and time is changed to the second conversion data ot Second Psem The specified second data is data time PSECTM changed into time data a date and conversion time Q Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e only 2 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later 3 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 4 This instruction is available for FP10SH Ver 3 10 or later 5 This instruction is available f
211. ive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity It could lead to an electric shock Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit Connect the wires or connectors securely The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Ground the protective earth PE terminal Class D grounding Failure to do so could lead to an electric shock Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid flammable materials metals to go into the inside of the product It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not undertake construction Such as connection and disconnection while the power supply is on It could lead to an electric shock Copyright Trademarks This manual and its contents are copyrighted You may not copy this manual in whole or part without written consent of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners PLC_BATPE FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures Table of Contents Before You Start 0 0 0 aaaea aeaaaee n een ene ees vii Special Precautions 00 ccc ccc cece cen eee x Compatibility with CPU Unit and Precautions xiii Compatibility of FP2SH and FP2 and Pr
212. ixed units 16 point DC input FP2 X16D2 16 point transistor output NPN type FP2 Y16T 16 point transistor output PNP type FP2 Y16P 6 point relay output type FP2 Y6R 16 point relay output type FP2 Y16R Analog input FP2 AD8VI Analog output FP2 AD8X RTD input FP2 RTD Positioning Positioning Positioning 2 axis 2 axis 4 axis Multifunction FP2 PP2 FP2 PP4 Transistor FP2 PP21 Line driver FP2 PP22 Serial data C C U MCU FP2 SDU FP2 CCU FP2 MCU S LINK FP2 SL2 Remote I O Slave FP2 RMS Multi wire link FP2 MW FMU FP2 DPV1 M FMU FP2 DEV M Positioning 4 axis MEWNET VE link FMU FP2 CAN M 32 point DC input FP2 X32D2 32 point transistor out put NPN type FP2 Y32T 32 point transistor out put PNP type FP2 Y32P Analog output FP2 DA4 Multifunction Transistor FP2 PP41 Line driver FP2 PP42 n 5 Communication Block FP2 CB232 FP2 CB422 FP2 VE FNS FP2 FNS Positioning RTEX MEWNET VE2 link 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations 64 point DC input FP2 X64D2 64 point transistor output NPN type FP2 Y64T 64 point transistor output PNP type FP2 Y64P 32 point input 32 point output NPN type FP2 XY64D2T 32 point input output NPN with on pulse catch input FP2 XY64D7T 32 point input 32 point output
213. k status W P link 2 Note2 Descriptions The link status for the MEWNET H link is monitored as Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits DT9195 0790195 95 DT90195 ee a Link status Unit number of H link 1 of H link 1 The link status for the MEWNET H link is monitored as DT9196 DT90196 Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits n ae Link status Unit number of H link 2 of H link 2 The link status for the MEWNET H link is monitored as DT9197 DT90197 Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits Link status Unit number of H link 3 of H link 3 Station number where the send area address for the PC PLC link is overlapped with this station is stored here Test result in the optical transmission path test mode for MEWNET P link system is stored here Counts how many times a token is lost Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected abnormality is detected Unidentified command A N A Note1 For FP10SH FP3 using H mode For FP2 FP2SH using W2 mode Note2 For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH 11 45 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address Descriptions ne ac ing A FP2SH FP10SH DT9213 DT90213 detected DT9214 DT90214 End code receiving error DT9215 DT9216 DT9217 DT90215 DT90216 DT90217 FP2 Counts how many times a parity error is Not support error Self diagnostic result Counts h
214. k button for the input output terminal block properly locked Are the terminal block mounting screws properly tightened Does the wiring of terminal match the signal name Wiring size to small for the current that is carried Connection cable Is the expansion cable properly connected Is the connection connector properly locked Is the total length 3 2 m or less FP2 backplane H type only Setting of CPU Is the mode selector set to the PROG mode Semano A e seeetearon erne Roana AME O Backup battery of CPU Has the insulating sheet for the FP2 CPU battery been removed paepae matey somenis r e EPESA GRU teny eomme O Expansion backplane lt FP2 backplane H type only gt a nohentng tained stg eitiecont Set of memory backup lt AFP2209 only gt battery for IC memory card Other sid Carefully check if there is potential for an accident Is the included battery installed Procedure Until Operation FP2 FP2SH 5 1 5 1 2 Before Turning ON the Power Procedure Up To Operation After installing and wiring perform the operation by following procedure Procedure 1 Power on 1 Before turning on the power check the items described on the pre vious page 2 Turn on the power and then check that the power supply unit s POW 2 ER LED and CPU s PROG LED are on Enter the program 1 When using a programming tool perform the operation Clear Pro 2 3 q S gram before inputting E
215. l the memory AFP5209 and write the data The ROM writer settings should be specified as those for the M27C2001 SGS TOMSON next page FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation eS Notes Refer to the commercially available ROM writer manual re garding the ROM IC type setting and writing method If a passwords is on the CPU it is possible to create a password for master memory When writing the contents of the FP2SH internal RAM to mas ter memory be sure to verify that the DIP switches SW2 is off position before turning the power on ee Notes 1 The above explanation describes the case where the memory unit is used in combination with F ROM and EP ROM As the nonvolatile memory has been implemented in the memory unit Model number AFP2208 a commercial ROM writer cannot be used for writing 2 The parts for the optional memory to be used differ depending on FP2 or FP2SH FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 7 Writing Data to the ROM Using the FPWIN GR With this method programs are sent directly from the personal computer FPWIN GR tool software to the ROM writer and are written to the ROM With the FP2SH this meth od can be used only when the expansion memory unit FP2 EM7 is used in combination with the FP2 C2 CPU Preparation Connect the personal computer and the ROM writer Commercially available ROM writer Procedure 1 O
216. le 4 25 4 4 3 Connecting the Terminals ccc cece eee 4 27 4 4 4 Connecting with Flat Cable Connector 00005 4 32 Wiring the Terminal Block Type I O Units 00 00 0006 4 34 Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH 4 6 4 5 1 Wiring the Terminal Block Type Units 005 4 34 Safety MGaSUICS 2 24i4 2444 54d eedidedddiiedaddeed ei ceec ceived es 4 36 AGA Safety Instructions anesan cacwatenetavelekawitence 4 36 4 6 2 Momentary Power Failures 0 0 0 cece eee eee 4 37 463 Alarm OQuloul 22 0te cag santecegevatedediertnei sede eideaa 4 37 Chapter5 Procedure Until Operation 5 1 5 2 Before Turning ON the Power 0 ccc eee eee teens 5 3 5 Check tems concr erent dhe ete eee e e ANE ERE 5 3 5 1 2 Procedure Up To Operation 0 cc nee 5 4 Programming with Programming Tool Software 00 cece 5 5 5 2 1 PreparalonS sorasta aA EOAR E RRN Se 5 5 5 2 2 Configuration of Programming Tool Software 5 6 5 2 2 1 Parameters and Setting Methods 5 6 Chapter6 FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 FPZ OperaliOn 1 c4 id 20d nded bea ada deus ai amp aad ie n as 6 3 6 1 1 FP2 RAM and ROM Operations 00 ccc eee ees 6 3 6 1 1 1 Comparison of RAM and ROM Operations 6 3 6 1 1 2 Retaining the Data During Power Outages 6 4 6 1 1 3 se
217. le Opera tion status Remote I O commu nication error MEW NET F attribute error Expansion unit power supply sequence error battery error Description and steps to take FPS FP X S LINK error Occurs only in FPO SL1 When one of the S LINK errors ERR1 3 or 4 has been detected error code E46 remote I O S LINK communication error is stored Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO MEW NET F communication error A communication abnormally was caused by a transmission cable or during the power down of a slave station FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO In the unit on the slave station an abnormality such as missing unit abnormal intelligent unit was detected FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition A AIA FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave s
218. le PLC FP2SH FP10SH Time at which the first error alarm relay DT90401 went on for year and month data Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Descriptions The time minute and second data at which the first error alarm relay in DT90401 went on is stored The time day and hour data at which the first error alarm relay in DT90401 went on is stored The time year and month data at which the first error alarm relay in DT90401 went on is stored 11 53 11 2 Table of Basic Instructions och f set FP2SH FP10SH Begins a logic operation with a Form A normally open contact Begins a logic operation with a Form B normally closed contact wa as re EF output Inverts the operated result up to this pea ee eee ee pc OM f Lolo ofololo D eee XYRT CL PE Anon fan AE Leading edge start Trailing edge start Leading edge AND Trailing edge AND Leading edge OR Trailing edge OR Leading edge out Trailing edge out a ES Alterna VRE tive out stink ad dali kl ucla soa Connects a Form A normally open contact g ofofofololo serially Connects a Form B normally closed contact lolololololo serially Connects a Form A normally open contact amp lolololololo in parallel Connects a Form B normally closed contact Poe in parallel Begins a logic operation only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Be
219. load Program from IC Card This enables one program to be selected from among the multiple programs stored on the IC memory card and read to the FPWIN GR Copy File from IC Card This reads a program or data file stored on the IC memory card and copies it to a floppy disk or hard disk When creating a copy of a file stored on the IC memory card first copy the file stored on the IC memory card that serves as the source file using this menu and then insert the new IC memory card and use Copy File from IC Card to copy the data from the disk to the IC memory card Initializing the IC Memory Card Erase IC Card This clears all of the contents from the IC memory card The program field assured with the Format IC Card function is cleared and the entire card is used as an expanded memory field Management of an SRAM type of IC Memory Card Before using the card Format IC Card The IC memory card is formatted and a program memory field is assured in which pro grams can be saved The remaining area assured as the program memory field then serves as an expanded memory area Writing data to the IC memory card Download Program to IC Card Programs are written from the FPWIN GR to the IC memory card Copy File to IC Card The contents of a floppy disk or hard disk are copied to the IC memory card This func tion can also be used to select multiple programs a
220. m a floppy disk or the hard disk to the IC memory card Boot the Data Editor In the Edit IC Memory Card Data mode create a file or open an existing file On the File menu select Download to PLC and transfer the data On the Tool menu choose IC Card Service and then Format IC Card Specify the necessary segment as a program memory and format it IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 2 Formatting and Erasing 7 2 2 Procedure for Formatting the IC Memory Card Formatting an FROM type When using this type formatting is done at the same time that the program on the disk is copied to the IC memory card with the FPWIN GR Procedure 1 Boot the Copy File to IC Card function On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Copy File to IC Card First the Specify Format win dow opens Specify Format Copy File gt IC Card Flash FA 2088 next page FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 2 7 2 Formatting and Erasing Specifying and running the format size Press the button next to Format Size to select the size Specify Format Copy File gt iC Card Flash xX Next click on the Execute button to open the Select File window Select Fife Copy File gt iC Card Flash Mem AES eee FPWIN GR NPST GR File fp spa fi i Selecting the file to be copied Select the file t
221. mmunicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 9 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 10 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 11 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 12 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 13 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 14 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 15 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 16 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Note W
222. morr Fi hri Bial Zs act Hokki Hehi l bin Di E ac aw Phal is a m B Cai D Diwa Hii iHi ETIE j Drs i feet FE bhid bd tee epee ens Se vi maia ji E j ie dinm aiie rie i i p ee Pe LL E Rin A j eo i DL I BL Pde Peki aiie ia ETA 2 Salect Fiange 40 iaia P PLC Emigrar Caos Select PLC Configuration I O Unit Remote I O and Click OK button The content of system registers and I O allocations will be cleared 3 17 I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 6 I O Numbers of Free Slots 3 6 I O Numbers of Free Slots 3 6 1 I O Numbers of Free Slots I O numbers are also assigned to modules slots where no units are installed Program ming and system construction can be made more efficient by using an appropriate manner of assigning I O numbers 3 6 2 Differences Due to Allocation Methods The manner of assigning I O numbers differs depending on the I O allocation method 3 6 2 1 When Arbitrary Allocation is Used I O point numbers can assigned as desired Advantage When designing a system with the intention of adding units in the future you can use arbitrary allocation to assign ahead of time the I O point numbers of the units to be ada ed If no assignment is made 0 is assigned By using I O number assignments that take into account future expansion when creat ing the program no discrepancies will occur when the new units are added on Planning ahead for expansion improves
223. mum scan time is stored here Scan time is calculated using the formula Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time The maximum and minimum values are cleared when each the mode is switched between RUN mode Scan time ms stored and PROG data decimal x 0 1 mode Example A K125 indicates 12 5 ms The mask conditions of interrupt unit initiated interrupts using ICTL instruction can be monitored here Monitor using binary display TE INT programs 12 1 8 7 4 3 0 presor S 0 interrupt disabled masked 1 interrupt enabled unmasked The mask conditions of interrupt unit initiated interrupts using ICTL instruction can be monitored here Monitor using binary display 3 INT program 23 20 19 praso tt N A LTT tt 0 interrupt disabled masked 1 interrupt enabled unmasked The value set by ICTL instruction is stored KO periodical interrupt is not used K1 to K3000 10ms to 30s or 0 5ms to 1 5s FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address FP2 FP2SH Descriptions FP10SH The value registered using programming tool software is stored nas DT90028 oo trace KO sampling triggered by F155 SMPL P155 PSMPL instruction K1 to K8000 x 10ms 10ms to 30s pele DT90029 Break address The address K constant of a break ina Note test run is stored A DT9030 D
224. n S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 g AND ese D lt 81 82 E A or S1 1 S1 gt 82 1 S2 ORD gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in p gt 31 82 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ORD lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in p04 5152 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 ORD lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in ORD gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in pe S s2 or S1 1 S1 82 1 S2 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Available X Not available Not available partially 11 60 _ ee Floating point type real number data compare Start FPO FP e Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 En bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 H5 2 ad S2 1 2 uE Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 at rs S S 1_ bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S241 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 G LET 51 52 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S24 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by compar
225. n F144 cannot be executed unless pin 5 is turned on Communications specifications Electrical characteristics conform to EIA RS232C The baud rate and transmission format are decided by system registers The table below shows the settings in the default state tem sd Description Mode selection eee link 19200 Lina Baud rate Data bit length The starting and ending codes when using a computer link are determined by the MEW TOCOL COM When using the general purpose communication function serial data communication control instruction F144 the setting of system register 412 should be changed The serial data communication control instruction can be used to switch between the computer link function and the general purpose communication function If the transmission speed is 38 400 bps or higher the transmission distance over which communication is possible is limited to within 3m 9 84ft 2 11 Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 2 FP2CPU 2 2 2 CPU with 64 Points Input FP2 C1D Parts Terminology and Functions Q Status indicator LEDs page 2 9 display the operating condition and error statuses 2 Initialize test switch page 2 9 is used to clear the errors initializes the operation memory and set the test operation 3 Mode selector page 2 10 is used to change the operation mode of the PLC 4 COM port RS232C page 2 11 is used to connect a computer or general serial d
226. n the Tool menu of the FPWIN GR tool software se lect ROM Writer to display the dialog box for the ROM writer 2 Specify Write as the Operation Method and Serial Port as the Input Output Destination and click on Ex ecute The program is sent to the ROM writer Commercially available ROM writer ee ese Note In the ROM writer settings the flow control X on off should be turned on next page FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 3 Install the memory in the commercially available ROM writer and write the data The ROM writer settings should be specified as those for the M27C2001 SGS TOMSON ea Notes Refer to the commercially available ROM writer manual re garding the ROM IC type setting and writing method Itis possible to create a password for master memory FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 6 8 1 Operating Using the IC Memory Card IC memory cards can be used to back up programs and as operation memories but they can also be used for operation with programs that have been written to the card Writing Programs to the Card The Copy File menu in the tool software is used to write programs to a card When this is used to transfer programs automatically a file created ahead of time must be con verted to
227. nal RAM of CPU may become improper Operations using FPWIN GR 1 On the Online menu select Online Edit Mode 2 On the Edit menu select Clear Program 6 11 FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 4 Writing to ROM C Reading a program from disk Operations using FPWIN GR On the File menu select Open and load the program from disk D Writing the program from the CPU to the optional memory FROM Operations using FPWIN GR 1 On the Online menu select Online Edit Mode 2 On the Tool menu select ROM amp RAM Service 7S 2A Sere i i Urititles 5 Pe Transher the pogam syen regisher ebr shoved in the intemal RAM of PLC into the ROM Dae 3 Select ROM lt RAM and click Execute button For information on operating the menus please check the Help menu E Writing to the optional memory EPROM with the ROM writer 1 Remove the optional memory FROM from the expansion memory unit and install it in the ROM writer 2 Copy the contents of the optional memory FROM to the ROM writer A ir ai 3 Remove the optional memory FROM and install the op tional memory EPROM and write the data to the EPROM 6 12 FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 5 FP2SH Operation 6 5 FP2SH Operation 6 5 1 Comparison of RAM ROM and IC Memory Card Operation With the FP2SH the user can select RAM operation RO
228. nd write them to the IC memory card as a batch all at once IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 5 Menus Related to Tool Software Other file management menus Delete File This deletes programs from the IC memory card This function can also be used to se lect multiple programs and delete them as a batch all at once Rename File This is used to change the file name or title of a program on the IC memory card Change File Attribute This is used for dedicated reading of programs stored on the IC memory card or to change the attributes of a hidden file Writing to an FROM Type IC Memory Card Copy File to IC Card Programs are written to an FROM type of IC memory card by copying the contents of a floppy disk or hard disk to the card With the FROM type of IC memory card it is not possible to update only partial sections of data or to change file names or delete files These functions should be carried out on the disk before the data is copied to the IC memory card Chapter 8 Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshoot ing Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting 8 1 Self Diagnostic Function 8 1 Self Diagnostic Function 8 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition Status Indicator LEDs on CPU Condition LED status Description Operation Program status Normal on on rere frere or or TEST er
229. ndition Switches SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 Switch position Baud rate for tool port System register setting 9 600bps Default value 19 200bps Program memory selection Internal RAM External memory Program memory protection Write enabled Write protected External memory selection ROM IC memory card Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 4 FP2SH CPU 2 5 Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 C2L FP2 C2 Parts Terminology AFP2207 FP2 EM7 AFP2208 Mounting knob 2 Connector rear side 3 ROM IC socket Install the optional memory FROM or EPROM Type of Expansion Memory Unit ET Ln 210 LACT Expansion Socket for installing the ROM in the CPU FP2 EM7 AFP2207 memory unit y Nonvolatile memory implemented memory unit a AFP2208 i Note The FP2 EM1 FP2 EM2 FP2 EM3 and FP2 EM6 expansion memory units for the FP2 cannot be used As for the memory unit AFP2208 the ROM is not removable Type of ROM Part number Equivalent to the 29EE020 150 4C PH SILICON STORAGE TECHNOLOGY AFP5208 INC Enables writing with the operation of the programming tools when attached to the CPU Equivalent to the M27C2001 150F1 SGS THOMSON MICROELECTRONICS AFP5209 A commercially available ROM writer is required for writing Installation Procedure For detailed information about the installation of expansion memory unit page 2 16 For detailed information about the installation of ROM page 2 17 2 22 FP2 FP2
230. nect a cable from the inside connector to the outside connector of the next expansion backplane Basic backplane mya JPE Expansion cable To outside inside T i nector Expansion backplane 2 To outside con nector a a i nector E A Expansion backplane 3 Ca nE a SSS SS awy To outside con Removing the expansion cable Hold down the buttons on the side of the connector to release it from the locked condi tion and pull out the expansion cable Hold down the buttons and pull outward 4 12 FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 1 Installation 4 1 4 Preparing the Backup Battery With the FP2 be sure to remove the insulating sheet of the backup battery before instal ling the CPU onto backplane With the FP2SH connect the connector of backup battery Make sure the connector terminals are positioned in the correct directions IC memory card AFP2209 The battery has been removed from the battery holder before shipment Install the bat tery before mounting the CPU unit 1 Move to the lock switch to the RELEASE position to ward the battery holder RELEASE position Lock switch 2 Remove the battery holder Battery holder 4 13 Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 1 Installation 3 Place the battery in the battery holder with the side with a sign facing up 4 Insert the battery holder with the battery
231. ng is effective In the FP2 FP2SH when the dip switch SW1 on the rear of the CPU is 19200 bps off the baud rate setting is effective 19200 bps 19200 bps 1200 bps 38400 bps 2400 bps 57600 bps 4800 bps 115200 bps 9600 bps UNUSED COM port is not used Communication method FP2SH COMP ee co Mee Ink setting for COM port FP10SH Computer link Communication format Character setting Common setting bit 8 bits for both computer link Parity chk and serial data With communication odd When used for computer Stop bit link the start and end 1 bit code settings of format End code for MEWTOCOL COM will CR Tool port Baud rate setting for the setting tool port mode when connecting C NET GENERAL serial data communication mode Character bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity chk non with odd with even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits End code CR CR LF NON ETX Start code NO STX STX port not be effective Start setting Available PLC FP2 code FP2SH NO STX 19200 bps 19200 bps a a setting for the 1200 bps 38400 bps Available PLC FP2 19200 bps 2400 bps 5 7600 bps FP2SH 4800 bps 115200 bps 9600 bps Unit number setting for COM port Available PLC FP2 FP2SH Modem compatibility Modem enabled Modem disabled setting for COM port Modem When connecting a modem set the Available PLC FP2 disabled unit number to 1 with system register FP2SH 415 Starting address setting for received buffer of FP2SH FP10
232. nit At the expansion backplane I O numbers are allocated continuing from the last number allocated to slots that do not actually exist on the CPU backplane 3 13 I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 3 1 O Mount Allocation 3 3 1 2 Procedure for I O Mount Allocation Preparations Turn on the power of the PLC and set the mode selector of the CPU to PROG mode Set the programming tool software to online monitor Procedure 1 On the Option menu select Allocate I O Map Atos Li Littell on x 2 Click Mount button The following message appears and then select Yes FPWIN GA the sen 10 adloceion n he coment mount atue ol units Suet Ho The appearance of the allocation of the mounted units will be read into and displayed on the FPWIN GR screen At the same time the contents of allocation will be registered in the system registers of CPU 3 14 FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 4 Automatic Allocation 3 4 Automatic Allocation 3 4 1 Using Automatic Allocation After turning on the power I O numbers are determined by the I O unit installation posi tions and assigned in order beginning from the left side of the CPU backplane lf an expansion backplane has been added on the FP2 backplane the number of slots for I O units on the CPU backplane is taken as 16 slots The FP2 backplane H type occupies 8 slots only For a slot with no unit mounted an equi
233. nter the program using the programming tool software Use the programming tool s total check function to check for syntax errors Check output wiring Use the forced I O function to check the output wiring Check input wiring Check the input wiring by using the input display LEDs or the monitor ing function of the programming tool Trial operation Switch the mode selector from PROG to RUN mode check the RUN LED turns on Check the operation of the program Edit the program debug if necessary lf there is an error in the operation check the program using the moni toring function of the programming tool Correct the program Save the edited program We highly recommend to save the created program onto a floppy disk or hard disk Printing out is also possible The program can also be saved on the ROM FP2 FP2SH Procedure Until Operation 5 2 Programming with Programming Tool Software 5 2 Programming with Programming Tool Software 5 2 1 Preparations FP2 FP2SH t ie a a a EE gt Setting the baud rate of CPU The baud rate setting switch is on the rear side of the CPU Perform the setting with the CPU removed from the backplane CPU rear side off 19200 bps on 9600 bps Set the baud rate of the computer to match that of the CPU Connecting the FP2 FP2SH to the computer Connect using the FP PC cable Computer settings Set to asynchronous For the setting proc
234. o remove the dust proofing label prior to operation Dust proofing label WDBDDD FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units 4 4 1 Wiring the Connector Type Units Wiring Method There are 4 methods for wiring to a connector type I O unit Choose the most appropri ate method depending on the installation conditions The set of connector for wire pressed terminal cable is supplied with the unit Cable with pressure connection HH HHHE terminal 40 pins SATA RTT HA RT CT 2 connector terminal 40 pins RT 2 relay terminal Connectorfor Flat cable with Used twice for each unit Used four times for wire pressed connector each unit a two terminal cable 40 pins branch cable is 40 pins Used twice for needed for connect Used twice for each unit ing each unit When using connector for wire pressed terminal cable Supplied with the unit You can directly connect wires from AWG 22 0 3mm and AWG 24 0 2mm2 Eliminates the bother of wiring connections because the wires can be connected with out removing the covers from the wires Can correct wiring mistakes easy A tool exclusively designed for this purpose is necessary For detailed information section 4 4 2 When using connector and relay terminals Can be connected using exclusive cables With the RT 2 relay terminal you can control up to 2A For detailed information section 4 4
235. o 40 pin Weight Approx 120g next page FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications eS Notes Keep the number of input and output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as de termined by the input voltage and ambient temperature Input Output 32 Number of points per com mon which are simultaneous 18 on 22 38 47 55 100 4 1166 131 Ambient temperature C F The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit Adjust the load current referring to the following range 100 Max load current mA 4 75 10 2 26 4 Power supply for driving internal circuit V Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Input TE ey en E AA O O fam 2 Output indicator LED 8 5 to 24V DC CN2 5 to 24V DC The COM pins of each connector are Although and terminals are connected internally connected internally with the same connector It is recommended that they also be connected externally FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications 2 11 3 32 point Type DC Input with On Pulse Catch Input Function 32 point Type Transistor Output NPN Unit Specifications mem SSSCSCSCSCSCSSSC dzD scription SSCS Min on voltage 19 2V 4m
236. o be copied to the IC memory card and click on OK The IC memory card is formatted and the file is written to the card IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 2 Formatting and Erasing Formatting the SRAM type With this type of card the IC memory card must be formatted before the program is saved to it and a program memory field must be assured to which the program will be saved This section explains how this is done using the FPWIN GR Procedure 1 Booting the Format IC Card function On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Format IC Card The Format IC Card window opens Forinat iC Card 64k next page 7 10 FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 2 Formatting and Erasing 2 Specifying and running the format size Press the button next to Format Size to select the size 2 onc any ones fen mapa mmi oe Cee o Next click on the Execute button to format the card at the specified size 7 2 3 Procedure for Erasing the IC Memory Card For both the SRAM type and the FROM type before the IC memory card can be used as an expanded memory any data already on the card must be erased and an area must be assured as the expanded memory field The procedure is described here us ing the FPWIN GR Procedure 1 Booting the Erase IC Card function On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then
237. o the area starting at D PICWT The data specified by S1 and S2 are aie x EGEE EEP ROM transferred to the EEP ROM starting at D The data specified by S1 and S2 are H F ROM transferred to the F ROM starting at D Data read ICRD The data stored in the expansion memory of the IC card specified by S1 and S2 TT are transferred to the area starting at D F13 Data write to ICWT The data specified by S1 and S2 are PICWT transferred to the IC card expansion memory area starting at D Program read PARo O The program specified using S is e xfx fo P14 from IC PPGRD transferred into the CPU from IC memory 3 x x x x x O memory card card and executes it Available Not available Not available partially n This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 2 This instruction is available for FPO Ver 2 0 or later and FP e S n d ae S2 D ae S20 ae S20 ae a Data read ICRD The data stored in the expansion memory from F ROM of the F ROM specified by S1 and S2 x x x are transferred to the area starting at D 11 62 FP2SH FP10SH P15 exchange PXCH P16 hende PDXCH er D141 D1 F17 Higher lower SWAP The higher byte and lower byte of D P17 byte in 16 bit PSWAP are exchanged 3 data exchange F18 16 bit data BXCH D1 Exchange the data between D1 and P18 block PBXCH D2 D3
238. ogram again When inputting with the programming tool software a deletion addition or change of order of an instruction ED LBL SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU A Available 11 85 11 4 2 Table of Self Diagnostic Error Opera Error i bor tion Description and steps to take code status ma Probably a hardware abnormality E20 CPUerror Stops Pace cont your dealer PT LTT bbls error error2 RAM Probably an abnormality in the internal RAM Stops Spee contact aera See RAM error5 Master memory The models of master memories are different A model Stops Use the master memories created with the 1 unmatch same model error FP e FP0 FPOR FP amp and FP1 C14 C16 Probably a hardware abnormality gt Please contact your dealer FP X When the master memory cassette is mounted the master memory cassette may be damaged Remove the master memory and check whether the ERROR turns off When the ERROR turned off rewrite the master memory as its contents are damaged and use it again When the ERROR does not turn off please a a Stops contact your dealer alalalalalalala FP1 C24 C40 C56 C72 and FP M Probably an abnormality in the memory unit Program the memory unit again and try to operate If the same error is detected try to operate with another memory unit FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP3 Th
239. ols G Programming tool software and cable section 1 4 1 Use a commercially available computer installed with the programming tool soft ware and an FP PC cable 2 Optional memory FROM For FP2 FP2 EM4 SST 29EE010 120 4C PH or equivalent SILICOM STOR AGE TECHNOLOGY INC For FP2SH AFP5208 SST 29EE020 150 4C PH or equivalent SILICOM STORAGE TECHNOLOGY INC 3 Optional memory EPROM For FP2 FP2 EM5 M27C1001 12F1 or equivalent SGS THOMSON MI CROELECTRONICS For FP2SH AFP5209 M27C2001 150F1 or equivalent SGS THOMSON MI CROELECTRONICS For the following use commercially available products 4 Commercially available ROM writer A ROM writer than can be used with memories 2 and 3 ge Note 1 The above explanation describes the case where the memory unit is used in combination with the F ROM and EP ROM As the nonvolatile memory has been implemented in the memory unit Model number AFP2208 a commercial ROM writer can not be used for writing 2 The parts for the optional memory to be used differ depending on FP2 or FP2SH 1 21 Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 4 Programming Tools When Creating ROM with Programming Tool Software and a Commercially Available ROM Writer Necessary tools 4 Programming tool software section 1 4 1 Use a commercially available PC installed with the programming tool software 2 Optional memory EPROM For FP2 FP2 EM5 M27C1001 12F1 or equivalent SGS THOMS
240. oltage drop Pressure connection terminal The following M3 pressure connection terminals are recommended for the wiring Fork type terminal Round type terminal 6mm 0 236in 6mm 0 236in or less or less 3 2mm 0 126in or more 3 2mm 0 126in or more next page 4 15 Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 2 Power Supply Wiring Example of suitable pressure connection terminal JST Mfg Co Ltd Round type 2 N3A 1 04 to 2 63mm2 Fork type 2 MS3 Use wire that is thicker than 2mm2 Power supply system Use separate wiring systems for the FP2 FP2SH power supply unit output devices and motorized devices Breaker Motorized device Insulated transformer ia Note Use the same power supply system for the expansion backplane and CPU backplane so that they are turned on and off simulta neously CPU backplane Simultaneous on and off via the same power sup ply system Expansion backplane Eliminating effects from noise Use a low noise power supply There is sufficient noise resistance for Superimposed noise in the power supply wiring however using an insulated transformer is recommended for further noise protection Twist the power supply wire to minimize the effects of noise 4 16 FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 2 Power Supply Wiring 4 2 2 Grounding Always ground the FP2 FP2SH PLC Ground the unit with the ground terminal as illustrated below D Ground terminal For gr
241. open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in pf S82 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in pf lt St 52 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt 82 or S1 S2 Available Not available Not available partially 16 bit data compare 11 59 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH H _ cen 32 bit Hr ta s2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 cala H 2 ia S2 1 2 compare bail WES 1 99 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 Start 1 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S27 STD _p gt 1 52 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 j E do E bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S24 1 S2 STD gt b gt S1 82 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 2 or S14 1 1 S24 1 S2 R STD lt E 81 99 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 1 _ bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S24 1 S2 D STD lt D Si 82 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition
242. or alarm relay which went on eee Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Third error alarm relay which went on pions Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Forth error alarm relay which went on gies Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Fifth error alarm relay which went on iii Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Sixth error alarm relay which went on 0130409 Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH on Read Descriptions ing The first error alarm relay number which went on is stored The error has been reset by executing a RST instruction Example 1 Using RST instruction Specify the stored error alarm relay number E12 X El2 Hor lt r Example 2 Using RST instruction and DT90401 x1 I DF lt R DT90401 gt Y A N A The error alarm relay number which went on is stored To reset the specified error alarm relay use an RST instruction only Relay number E12 to reset X1 E12 H DF i Seventh error alarm relay which went on Bisons Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available FP10SH DT90408 DT90409 DT90410 DT90411 DT90412 DT90413 DT90414 Eighth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Ninth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Tenth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Eleventh error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH
243. or FP 32k type 6 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 7 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used xo Se S S ee ee 11 74 Boolean 16 bit binary GRY data gt Gray PGRY code conversion 32 bit binary data gt Gray Ope Description rand S D Converts the 16 bit binary data of S to gray codes and the converted result is stored in the D DGRY S D Converts the 32 bit binary data of PDGRY S 1 S to gray code and the converted result is stored in the D 1 D S D Converts the gray codes of S to binary data and the converted D s I FP x FP2SH FP10SH code conversion F237 16 bit gray code GBIN P237 binary data PGBIN S pT x ror S1 Checks the ASCII data strings to be S2 n used in F251 ATOB instruction Character strings instructions Comparing character oO NO NO conversion result is stored in the D e F238 32 bit gray code DGBIN S D Converts the gray codes of S 1 S P238 binary data PDGBIN to binary data and the converted O GJO conversion result is stored in the D 1 D F240 Bit line to bit COLM S n The values of bits 0 to 15 of S are o ofo P240 column PCOLM D stored in bit n of D to DC 15 O o a a conversion F241 Bit column to bit LINE S n The values of bit n of S to S 15 a o P241 line conv
244. or will not be determined if the battery is replaced during power on About AIC52000 An internal secondary battery is provided for backup purposes The data on the SRAM type IC memory card is backed up by a chargeable secondary battery When the card is first inserted in the CPU and the power supply is turned on the battery is not charged so an error reading IC card battery error occurs Before using the card for the first time always insert it in the CPU and leave it for at least 24 hours before turning on the power supply This fully charges the battery Memory backup time Ambient temperature of 25 C Model No Memory retention time The battery life AFP2209 Approx 3 years or more AIC52000 3 months If operated at 25 C for 12 hours a day with the power supply off Approx 10 years The service life is shorter at high temperatures or if the power supply is left off or long periods of time IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 1 Using the IC Memory Card 7 1 2 Using the IC Memory Card The IC memory card is available as an optional memory for the FP2 C2P FP2 C3P It cannot be used with the FP2 C2 IC memory cards can be used for two types of applications saving programs and ex panding the data memory area Also a single IC memory card can be used in the following three ways Only for saving programs Only for expanding the data memory area For both saving programs and expanding the data memory area
245. orms processing without checking for overflow of the index modifier area Note The error alarm relay is available for FP2SH and FP10SH FP2 FP2SH FP10SH ress Counter starting address setting the number of timers and counters Hold type area starting address setting for timer counter Hold type area starting address setting for internal relays in word units 7 Hold type area starting address setting for data registers Hold type area starting address setting for file registers For FP2SH bank 0 Hold type area starting address setting for MEWNET W P link relays for PC link 0 Note Hold type area starting address setting for MEWNET W P link relays for PC link 1 Note Hold Non hold Hold type area starting address setting for MEWNET W P link data registers for PC link 0 Note Hold type area starting address setting for MEWNET W P link data registers for PC link 1 Note Hold or non hold setting for step ladder process Hold type area starting address setting for file register for bank 1 Default Pa Descriptions value FP2SH FP10SH FP10SH 3000 0 to 3072 1000 O to 1024 FP2SH FP2SH FP10SH FP10SH 3000 0 to 3072 1000 O to 1024 FP2SH FP2SH Set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value FP10SH 500 FP2 200 FP2 0 to 253 FP2SH FP10SH 0 to 10240 FP2 0 to 6000 FP2SH FP10SH 0 to 32765 FP2 16K 0 to 14333 FP2 32K 0 to 30
246. otective circuit across the ends of the load This will effect the life of the relay When using an AC type inductive load Surge absorber Example of surge absorber R 502 C 0 47uF aie Output 2 terminal Output terminal Output unit Output unit When using a DC type inductive load Diode Output J terminal Output unit Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 3 Wiring Input and Output Connection of Capacitive Loads When connecting the loads with large in rush currents be sure to connect a protection circuit such as resistor or inductor in series with the load as shown below Inductor Precautions for Overload To protect the units from overloading it is recommended to attach an external fuse for each point There are times that the elements for the output units cannot be protected even if external fuses are connected 4 3 3 Cautions Regarding Units Wiring Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and so that the input and output wiring is separated from the power wiring as so much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together Separate the wires of input output circuit from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100mm 3 937in Dust Proofing Label Do not remove the dust proofing label that is attached to the upper portion of the unit until the unit is completely installed and the wiring is completed However be sure t
247. ounding purposes use ground wires with a minimum of 2mm AWG14 and the grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 1009 The point of grounding should be as close to the FP2 FP2SH PLC as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible If two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for each device FP2 FP2SH Other PLC device FP2 FP2SH Other PLC device 4 17 Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 3 Wiring Input and Output 4 3 Wiring Input and Output 4 3 1 Input Wiring Before the wiring carefully confirm the specifications for the units to be wired Specifi cally limitations on the ambient temperature and number of points that can be on simultaneously will differ for different units Connection of Sensors Relay output type ee terminal Sensor b eset aa unit Internal circuit OO 3 Power supply power supply for sensor for input Voltage output type Sensor DC Input COM unit Internal circuit Power supply for input PNP open collector output type Input terminal Sensor Internal circuit Power supply for input NPN open collector output type Input terminal Sensor DC Input COM unit Internal circuit Power supply for input Two wire type Input terminal Internal circuit Power supply for input 4 18 FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 3 Wiring Input and
248. output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Pulse strings are output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S PWM output is output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Outputs the pulses from the specified channel according to the data table specified by S Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc Available Not available Not available partially 1 The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels 2 This instruction is available for FP C32T2 C28P2 C32T2H and C28P2H ot Mt Ni W w FP2SH FP10SH ee ee 11 78 FP2SH FP10SH FPO FP e FPX Boolean ORS Description rand Screen display instructions F180 FP e screen SCR 1 S2 Register the screen displayed on d
249. oving the IC memory card Do not try to insert and remove the IC memory card while the IC memory card access enable switch is on It could lead to damage of the memory contents or a malfunction of CPU Do not use excessive force to the card or the section where card is installed Battery of the SRAM type IC memory card AIC52000 A rechargeable battery is used It cannot be exchanged AFP2209 An interchangeable battery is used When you use for the first time install the battery included igs Note If the battery voltage has dropped the ERROR LED lights and error code K55 or K54 is stored in special data register DT90000 Error codes can be confirmed using programming tools K54 The data on the IC memory card is not retained K55 The data on the IC memory card is guaranteed but the voltage of the internal battery has dropped AlIC52000 Power should continue to be supplied to the unit in order to charge it AFP2209 The replacement of memory backup battery is neces sary As the data saved in AFP2209 is overwritten when replacing the battery the data must be backed up before the replacement Write protection of IC memory card There is a write protect switch on the IC memory card To prohibit writing to the IC memory card set this switch to Write protect position To write the program or data to the IC memory card set the write protect switch to off position Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 7 Powe
250. ow many times loop change is DT9218 DT90218 detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH MEWNET Counts home many times link error is W P link detected status W P link 2 Note DT9219 DT90219 Counts how many times main loop break is N A detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Counts how many times sub loop break is detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Available PLC FP3 FP10SH DT9220 DT90220 DT9221 DT90221 DT9222 DT90222 DT9223 DT90223 Loop input status EEA EEEE Available PLC FP3 FP10SH DT9225 DT90225 Not used o S o o DT9226 DT90226 Not used DT9227 DT90227 Notused DT9228 DT90228 Notused Z o gt S So So o o DT9229 DT90229 Notused Station number where the send area address for the PC link is overlapped with this station is stored here Test result in the optical transmission path DT9231 DT90231 test mode for MEWNET P link system is DT90232 Yre ank ET Note are detected DT90234 DT9235 DT90235 Counts how many times a synchronous abnormality is detected DT9236 DT90236 Send NACK DT9237 DT90237 Send NACK Note For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH 11 46 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address FP2 FP2SH FP10SH DT9238 DT9239 DT9240 DT9241 DT9242 pT9243 pT90243 Count
251. pecified as any of the following fields WL WR DT FL SV EV and LD CPU rear side Preparation Set the CPU in the PROG mode Procedure 1 Select Online Edit Mode on the Online menu bdder Syinbol View Online Edit Mode start Monitoring PLO Mode RUN The system goes online and online monitoring begins automatically The icon on the tool bar can also be used to do this 2 Select ROM amp RAM service on the Tool menu ROM amp RAM service mw next page 6 23 FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation The ROM amp RAM Service window opens ROM lt RAM CI Close Transfer the program system register etc stored in the ROM or IC card into the internal RAM of PLC Help 3 Select ROM lt RAM and press the Data button ROM amp RAM Service Untitie2 WA C ROM gt RAM Transter the program system register etc stored in the internal RAM of PLC Data into the ROM or IC card aa Help The Data Register Range Setup window opens 4 Select the data and specify the range Clicking on the check box in front of the data type speci fies whether or not that data can be sent Data marked with a check mark can be sent To specify the range double click on the list Storage Capacity of User ROM The potential storage capacity of user ROM is Number of program step Fixed value 2k words Data
252. ple above if the time was 5 minutes 29 seconds it will become 5 minutes 0 second and if the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds it will become 6 minutes 0 second 11 35 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address FP2 Descriptions FP3 FP2SH FP10SH The system uses this as a Serial communication status when DT9059 yas communication error occurs Note DT90059 communication Higher 8 bits Daer B E For GOM port For tool port Step ladder DT9060 DT90060 process 0 to 15 Step ladder DT9061 DT90061 process 16 to 31 Step ladder DT9062 DT90062 process 32 to 47 Step ladder DT9063 DT90063 process 48 to 63 Step ladder DT9064 DT90064 DaO 64 to 79 Indicates the startup condition of the Step ladder step ladder process When the process a ieee process 80 to 95 starts up the bit corresponding to the Step ladder pro process number turns on 1 DT9066 DT90066 lt gt p cess 96 to 111 NNN l Step ladder pro Monitor using binary display DT9067 DT90067 cess 112 to 127 l Step ladder pro 0 not executing 1 executing DT9068 DT90068 cess 128 to 143 l Example DT9069 DT90069 sa Fees amna aa Ste ladder ro OT 060DT20060 0 01 0 0 01 010 01 010 1010 DT9070 DT90070 a ai ie om Steb ladder Dro Since bit position 0 of DT9071 DT90071 ep 176 t j 91 DT9060 DT90060 is 1 step ladder cess 4 dd 2 process 0 is executing DT9072 DT90072 S
253. positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Output specifica Insulation method Optical coupler Mons Rated load voltage 5 to 24V DC Load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4V DC Maximum load current 0 1A at 12 to 24V DC 50mA at 5V DC Note Off state leakage current 1uA or less On state maximum voltage drop 1V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time 0 1ms or less 0 3ms or less Power supply for Voltage 4 75 to 26 4V DC driving internal circuit 120mA or less at 24V DC Surge absorber Zener diode None Common method Output points 32 points common per common Common specifi Internal current consumption at 150mA or less cations 5V DC Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External connection method Connector two 40 pin Approx 120g Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications eS Notes Keep the number of input and output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as de termined by the input voltage and ambient temperature Input Output 39 24V DC 26 4V DC Number of points per com mon which are 20 simultaneous on 25 43 51 55 109 4 123 8 131 Ambient temperature C F The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit Adjust the load current referring to the following range
254. ptions ing The Real Time Clock Clock Calendar is adjusted as follows When setting the Real Time Clock Clock Calendar by program By setting the highest bit of DT9058 DT90058 to 1 the time becomes that written to DT9054 to DT9057 DT90054 to DT90057 by FO MV instruction After the time is set DT9058 DT90058 is cleared to 0 Cannot be performed with any instruction other than FO MV instruction lt Example gt Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5 day when the XO turns on xo Inputs 0 min lt pF gt Fo MV H 0 DT9054 and 0 sec FO MV H 512 DT9055 sii Mig our ay FO MV H8000 DT9058 Sets the time Real Time If you changed the values of DT9054 to Clock DT9057 DT90054 to DT90057 with Clock programming tool software the time will be DT9058 DT90058 Calendar set when the new values are written A A setting and Therefore it is unnecessary to write to 30 seconds DT9058 DT90058 correction When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT9058 DT90058 to 1 the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds After the correction is completed DT9058 DT90058 is cleared to 0 lt Example gt Correct to 0 seconds with XO turns on x0 lt DF F0 MV H 1 DT9058 Correct to 0 second At the time of correction if between 0 and 29 seconds it will be moved down and if the between 30 and 59 seconds it will be moved up In the exam
255. r Supply Units 2 7 Power Supply Units 2 7 1 Power Supply Specifications Parts Terminology and Functions G POWER LED Turns on when power is applied 2 Power supply terminal is the terminal for power supply wiring Uses M3 crimping pressure connection terminals section 4 2 1 3 Ground terminal To minimize effects from noise and prevent electrical shocks connect this terminal to ground 4 Alarm output terminal Contact output terminals of the relay which turns on when the ALARM LED of the CPU turns on Normally closed contact N C and normally open contact N O are available 5 Unit installation screw 6 Temporary holding hook FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 7 Power Supply Units Specifications em Description Size ofunit mae emoe oO Current consumption 0 4A or less 0 2A or less 0 7A or less 2 5A or less at 100V AC at 200V AC at 100V AC 0 4A or less at 200V AC 40A or less 30A or less 10A or less at 25 C 77 F Rated frequency 50Hz 60Hz Operating voltage 85 to 132V AC 170 to 264V AC 85 to 264V AC 20 4 to 31 2V DC range 1 30V DC 1A When the ALARM LED of CPU is lit Between input and ground terminals 0 75mA or less Breakdown voltage 1500V AC for 1 minutes 500V AC for 1 between input and ground terminals minutes between input and ground terminals Fue S Btn SSCSC SsS S 1 The allowable variation in voltage after startup is 15 6V to 31 2V
256. r Timer size increases _ _ Last number For FP2 FP2SH set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value This sets the timer to a non hold type and counter to a hold type By setting system register 5 to 0 the whole area becomes the counter Also by setting it to the value 1 higher than the last number the whole area becomes the timer Hold type area starting address system registers 6 to 13 Set each relay and register to a hold type or non hold type Non hold Set value lt n type Hold type size increases Set value gt n Set value n Hold type Non hold type size increases For normal situations set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value This sets the timer to a non hold type and counter to a hold type By setting this value to the first number the whole area becomes hold type Also by setting it to the value 1 higher than the last number the whole area becomes non hold type The relays and registers for links not specified in the send area of system registers 40 to 55 are non hold type regardless of what is set here For the FP2SH FP10SH the index registers can be set to hold type or non hold type The register numbers and settings are related as shown below Bank 0 Banki 14 t0 27 Bank2 28 to 41 pBank3 42to45 BankBO 154to1e7 _ __ Bank5 70to83 Bank 182 tO 195 Bank6 84to97 BankE 1960209 Bank7 98tott Bank 210 2B efault value of hold type ar
257. r in parentheses For the FP and FP X the number of steps varies according to the specified timer number or counter number 11 55 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Symbol Description UP DOWN F118 Increments or decrements from the counter UDC preset value S based on up down 5 input i Shift Data caw Shifts one bit of 16 bit word internal register Shift relay WR data to the left Resat Left right F119 mj Shifts one bit of 16 bit data range shift LRSR D specified by D1 and D2 to the left or register i to the right Control instructions Master MC Starts the master control program control relay igen control area J Ends the master control program Master ji a control relay end The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there Auxiliary The program jumps to the label jump instruction specified by S and continues from there Label The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there the number of jumps is set in S Stops program execution when the predetermined trigger turns on in the TEST RUN mode only oF Available X Not available Not available partially 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when internal relay WR240 or higher is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the specified internal relay number word address has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses
258. rammed with the OT PO to P63F PO to P127F and OT instructions Error alarm relay E If turned on while the unit is running this 2 048 points relay stores the history in a dedicated buff EO to E2047 er Program this relay so that it is turned on at the time of abnormality Special internal R Relay which turns on or off based on spe 176 points 176 points relay cific conditions and is used as a flag R9000 to R9000 to R910F R910F 10 10 FP2 FP2SH Specifications 10 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Memory External input relay Code for specifying 16 exter 128 words 512 words area nal input points as one word WXO to WX127 WX0 to WX511 16 bits of data External output Code for specifying 16 exter 128 words 512 words relay nal output points as one word WYO to WY127 WYO to WY511 16 bits of data Internal relay Code for specifying 16 inter 253 words 887 words nal relay points as one word WRO to WR252 WRO to WR886 16 bits of data 640 words WLO to WL639 Link relay Code for specifying 16 link 128 words relay points as one word 16 WLO to WL127 bits of data Data register Note 1 6 000 words 10 240 words DTO to DT5999 DTO to DT10239 Data memory used in pro gram Data is handled in 16 bit units one word This is a shared data 256 words memory which is used within LDO to LD255 the MEWNET link system Data is handled in 16 bi
259. re the send area address for the PC link is overlapped with this station is stored here Test result in the optical transmission path test mode for MEWNET P link system is stored here are detected abnormality is detected WEP ik status Eeiectee A N A IWIP link 1 Note Counts how many times loop change is detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Counts home many times link error is detected Counts how many times main loop break is detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH DT9188 DT90188 DT9189 DT90189 DT9190 DT90190 DT9191 DT90191 DT9192 DT90192 Counts how many times sub loop break is detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop reconstruction condition Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop operation mode i a Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop input status Bee EAR Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Note For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available FP2 FP3 FP2SH FP10SH DT9195 DT90195 DT9196 DT90196 DT9197 DT90197 DT9198 DT90198 Notused _ DT9199 DT90199 Notused _ DT9200 DT90200 DT9201 DT90201 DT9203 DT90203 DT9205 DT90205 MEWNET H link status link unit number H link 1 Note1 MEWNET H link status link unit number H link 2 Note1 MEWNET H link status link unit number H link 3 Note1 MEWNET W P lin
260. red off Battery charge or replacement is not required FP10SH on Battery replacement is required off Battery replacement is not required Monitors the protective condition of the IC memory card as on The protect switch is not in the write protected WP position off The protect switch is in the write protected WP position Monitors the condition of the IC memory card access enables switch as on access enabled The access enable switch is in the on position off access disabled The access enable switch is in the off position Note The IC memory card backup battery condition can be judged using special internal relays R9101 and R9102 as follows R9102 IC memory card condition Charge replace backup battery The data in the IC memory card is maintained The data in the IC memory card cannot be maintained Charge replace backup battery OFF JOF o O Not battery charge replacement required 11 28 11 1 3 Special Data Registers for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address ied Descriptions ll FP2SH ing in FP10SH g The self diagnostic error code is stored pT9000 DT90000 Self diagnostic here when a self diagnostic error occurs A N A error code Monitor the error code using decimal display DT9001 DT90001 Notused CNA CNA Communication The slot number where an erroneous error of unit is installed can be monitored
261. rns off when unit No 14 is in the PROG mode ee E oraa eames Turns off when unit No 15 is in the PROG mode Z iS eagioate ENER e Turns off when unit No 16 is in the PROG mode Note When the system registers 46 KO PC link O for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 1 for one with a larger slot No When the system registers 46 K1 PC link 1 for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 0 for one with a larger slot No R9099 W P Note Turns on when unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 10 is in the PROG mode 11 27 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description R9100 R9101 Note R9104 R9105 to R910F IC memory card installation flag Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH IC memory card backup battery flag 1 Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH IC memory card backup battery flag 2 Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH IC memory card protect switch flag Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH IC memory card access switch flag Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Monitors whether the IC memory card is installed or not on IC memory card is installed off IC memory card is not installed Monitors the voltage drop condition for the IC memory card as on Data in the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed off Data in the IC memory card can be maintained Monitors the voltage drop condition for the IC memory card as FP2SH on Battery charge or replacement is requi
262. rror in the link area settings When using MEWNET W link unit or MEWNET P link unit turns on when transmission error occurs at link 4 turns on when there is an error in the link area settings When using MEWNET W link unit or MEWNET P link unit turns on when transmission error occurs at link 5 turns on when there is an error in the link area settings When using MEWNET F remote I O system turns on when transmission error occurs on master 1 turns on when there is an error in the settings When using MEWNET F remote I O system turns on when transmission error occurs on master 2 turns on when there is an error in the settings When using MEWNET F remote I O system turns on when transmission error occurs on master 3 turns on when there is an error in the settings Remote lO iransmiesiot When using MEWNET F remote I O system R905B turns on when transmission error occurs on master 4 error flag master 4 turns on when there is an error in the settings R905C to R905F 11 23 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Turns on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in the PC R9061 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in the PC R90
263. rting it all the way to its original position and pressing the lock button on the bottom of the unit Then confirm that the terminal block is securely attached and cannot be removed Use the numbers described on the terminal cover by replacing with the printed contents of the terminal layout for the main unit Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 6 Safety Measures 4 6 Safety Measures 4 6 1 Safety Instructions Precautions Regarding System Design In certain applications malfunction may occur for the following reasons Power on timing differences between the PLC system and I O or motorized devices An operation time lag when a momentary power failure occurs Abnormality in the PLC external power supply or other devices In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequates safety measures listed in the following Interlock circuit When a motor clockwise counter clockwise operation is controlled provide an interlock circuit that prevents clockwise and counter clockwise signals from inputting into the mo tor at the same time Emergency stop circuit Add an emergency stop circuit to controlled devices in order to prevent a system shut down or an irreparable accident when malfunction occurs Start up sequence The PLC should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized To keep this sequence the following measures are recommended Turn on the PLC
264. ruction for FPO FP e gt S O High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPO FP e High speed MV S Performs high speed counter and counter and DT9052 Pulse output controls according Pulse output to the control code specified by controls S The control code is stored in DT9052 Change and DMV Transfers S 1 S to high speed read of the en counter a Pulse output speed 7 elapsed value value area of high speed DT9044 Transfers value in high speed counter and D counter and Pulse output elapsed Pulse output value area to D 1 D High speed HC1S n S Yn Turns output Yn on when the counter output elapsed value of the built in high set with speed counter reaches the target channel value of S 1 S specification Q Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 V2 3 or later and FP e 2 The instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later and the pulse execution type can be specified FP10SH cannot be used 3 This instruction is available for FP Ver 2 0 or later 4 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 5 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later 11 70 Boo D inti lean Operand escription HC1R n S Yn Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Outputs a positioning pulse from the specified output YO or
265. ruction is available for FP X V1 20 or later and FP 32k type This instruction is available for FP X V2 50 or later and FP V3 20 or later s xwe Se S Sr 11 69 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Ope mes A Boolean p Description A rand intelligent unit PREAD n D intelligent unit l 3 MF S at OE intelligent unit PWRT n D unit 3 F152 Data read from RMRD 1 2 Reads the data from the P152 MEWNET F eet unit at the MEWNET F eette slave station remote I O slave station Data write into RMWT 1 S2 Writes the data into the intelligent MEWNET F PRMWT n D unit at the MEWNET F remote x x D slave station I O slave station eg Sa fags tain ols fafa P155 PSMPL ae ee as ee Sampling STRG a the trigger of this ee trace stops F157 Time addition CADD E The time after S2 1 S2 P157 PCADD elapses from the time of S1 2 S1 1 S1 is stored in D 2 D 1 D F158 Time CSUB The time that results from P158 subtraction PCSUB oe subtracting S2 1 S2 from the time S1 2 S1 1 S1 is stored in D 2 D 1 D F159 Serial port MTRN S n D This is used to send data to an P159 communication PMTRN external device through the specified CPU COM port or MCU COM port reception PMRCV D2 equipment via the COM port of the specified MCU BIN arithmetic instruction BIN arithmetic instruction O O o O F160 Double word DSQR S D P160 32 bit data PDSQR v S D 7 xlalolole square root High speed counter Pulse output inst
266. s the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses For the FP and FP X the number of steps varies according to the relay number to be used 11 54 i O FPO FP e n Stores the operated result up to this instruction 2 Read stack Pop stack Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction 2 Leading edge differential I t an 1 E stored by the PSHS instruction Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Trailing edge Turns on the contact for only one differential scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected The leading edge detection is possible on the first scan RLE Output is set to and held at on _ s Leading edge differential initial execution D Y Output is set to and held at off lt R gt B Outputs at set trigger and holds until reset trigger turns on 2 Basic function instructions On delay timer TML After set value n x 0 001 seconds a 4 3 E type tJ ty L tL timer contact a is set to on TMR Er After set value n x 0 01 seconds le e timer contact a is set to on 4 gt 7 TMX E After set value n x 0 1
267. s how many times a parity error is detected DT9244 DT9245 DT9246 DT9247 Counts how many times loop change is DT9248 DT90248 Wp detected st t s Available PLC FP3 EP LOSH DT9249 DT90249 WP link 3 Counts home many times link error is Note detected Counts how many times main loop break is DT9250 DT90250 detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Counts how many times sub loop break is DT9251 DT90251 detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop reconstruction condition epee nears Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop operation mode here e Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop input status ee eee Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Monitoring tool port station No Station number BCD H1 to H32 set for tool eee Available port is stored here PLC FP2SH FP10SH Monitoring COM port station No Station number BCD H1 to H32 set for tool peur Available port is stored here PLC FP2SH FP10SH Note For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH Descriptions 11 47 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address FP2 Read ing FP2SH Descriptions FP10SH Operation An Operation error program block number error program is stored higher byte here when an No hold operation error is detected OTAN Available Program block number PLC FP2SH H1 In the first program block FP10SH H2 In the 2nd program block
268. s the on state when a backup battery Backup battery error error occurs To reset R9006 flag hold turn the power to off and then turn it on initialize after removing the cause of error Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error occurs The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017 Operation error flag Indicates the first operation error which occurred hold FP2SH FP10SH When program is 120k steps and the higher byte of DT90257 is H2 the error occurs in the 2nd program block In case of the 1st program block it is H1 Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT90018 Operation error flag The contents change each time a new error occurs non hold FP2SH FP10SH When program is 120k steps and the higher byte of DT90258 is H2 the error occurs in the 2nd program block In case of the 1st program block it is H1 cayna Turns on for an instant Carry flag when an overflow or underflow occurs when 1 is set by one of the shift instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared results become gt Fla larger in the F60 CMP P60 PCMP g F61 DCMP P61 PDCMP F62 WIN P62 PWIN or F63 DWIN P63 PDWIN comparison instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared results are equal in the comparison instructions when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic instructions FP2
269. s write a specified number of characters from a character string to a specified position in the character string A specified number of characters in a character string are rewritten starting from a specified position in the character string Available Not available Not available partially This instruction is available for FPE 32k type 2 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later 3 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later NW N m N w 5 F264 P264 Writing a character string to a character string Replacing character strings LNS NO 5 Z O na O O L O 11 75 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Ope ee Boolean p Description rand Integer type data processing instructions F270 Maximum S1 Searches the maximum value in the P270 value word S2 D word data table between the S1 and data 16 bit S2 and stores it in the D The a LL address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 F271 Maximum DMAX S1 Searches for the maximum value in P271 value double PDMAX S2 D the double word data table between word data 32 the area selected with S1 and S2 bit and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F272 Minimum value S1 Searches for the minimum value in P272 word data 16 S2 D the word data table between the area bit selected with S1
270. seconds 3 timer contact a is set to on 4 TMY After set value n x 1 second timer 4 contact a is set to on 5 Auxiliary timer F137 vRLE After set value S x 0 01 seconds 16 bit STMR H Hewsmes oH H the specified output and R900D are set to on Auxiliary timer F183 YRLE After set value S x 0 01 seconds 32 bit DSTM H HEwoosm s oH the specified output and R900D are set to on Time constant processing a T Q Available Not available Not available partially 1 The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models 3 For FP2SH FP10SH and FP X Ver2 0 or later any device can be set for the setting value of counter or timer instruction 4 5 r D a 1 Pj 4 G O This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when using Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 or anything beyond for the KP instruction the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses 6 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when timer 256 or higher or counter 255 or lower is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier the number of steps is the numbe
271. ssary devices in configuration 1 1 communication 1 N communication FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Commercially available computer Commercially available computer MODEM MODEM Commercially available RS232C cable Commercially available RS232C cable When using the TOOL port an FP PC cable M5 C NET adapter AFP8536 AFP8532 x 1 piece type AFC8513 and a self made cable are nec essary C NET adapter S2 type AFP15402 x number of PLC Two core cable VCTF 0 75mm2 1 18 FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 1 Tools Needed for Programming Necessary tools 3 Commercially available computer Programming tool software Q Programming tool software This is a program editing debugging and document creating software package that can be used with all programmable controllers in the FP series 2 FP PC cable This cable needed for connection between the FP2 FP2SH and the computer When connecting to a computer IBM PC AT or 100 compatible use a com mercially available adapter section 1 4 2 For the following use commercially available products 3 Commercially available computer 1 19 Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver 2 Type of software OS Hard disk capacity Product No Operating system FPWIN GR Ver 2 Full type Windows 98 40MB or more A
272. stations can be connected The CPU of the FP2 FP2SH includes a COM RS232C port and TOOL RS232C port as standard equipment making it possible to connect a MODEM to perform pro gramming and computer linking from a remote location using a public telephone line When the power supply of FP2 FP2SH is turned on it will verify whether a MODEM is connected and if a MODEM is it will automatically transmit the AT command to set the MODEM for automatic reception Since the reading and writing of the relay conditions and register contents of the pro grammable controller can be performed from the host computer this function is applicable for remote monitoring systems When using the TOOL port you can use programming tool software NPST GR FPWIN GR and perform reading and writing of the programmable controller program and main tenance operations via MODEM During 1 1 communication using the COM port an error alarm can be issued from the programmable controller 1 17 Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 3 Expansion Function Table of specifications 1 1 communication 1 N communication Communication method Half duplex Synchronization method Start stop synchronous system Transmission speed 2 400bps 4 800bps 9 600bps 19 200 9 600bps 19 200bps Baud rate bps Transmission code ASCII Transmission format Character bit 7 bits parity check odd and stop bit 1 bit Character bit 8 bits parity check none and stop bit 1 bit Nece
273. subtracted is the sequence program area that can actually be used File register area D is the area that remains after A B and C have been subtracted from the user memory capacity The configuration area is reserved for future expansion FP2 16K Users memory capacity 16K words Setting range of A 2K to 16K words default value 12k Setting range of B 0 to 14K words default value 0 Setting range of C O to 14K words default value 0 Allocate so that A B C216 Setting example The values of D when B C 0 Area for sequence program a 1024 x A 512 Area for file registers D 1 535 steps 14 333 words 3 583 steps 12 285 words 5 631 steps 10 237 words 7 679 steps 8 189 words 9 727 steps 6 141 words 11 775 steps default value 4 093 words default value 13 823 steps 2 045 words 15 871 steps O word FP2 32K Users memory capacity 32K words Setting range of A 2K to 32K words default value 12k Setting range of B 0 to 30K words default value 0 Setting range of C 0 to 30K words default value 0 Allocate so that A B C lt 32 Setting example The values of D when B C 0 Area for sequence program A 1024 x A 512 Area for file registers D 1 535 steps 30 717 words 3 583 steps 28 669 words 5 631 steps 26 621 words 7 679 steps 24 573 words 9 727 steps 22 525 words 11 775 steps default value 20 477 words default value 13 823 steps 15 871 steps 17 919 steps 19 967 steps 2
274. t 008 2 39 2 10 2 6 point Type Relay Output Unit 0 0 00 eee 2 41 2 10 3 16 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit 2 43 2 10 4 16 point Type Transistor PNP Output Unit 2 45 2 10 5 32 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit 2 47 2 10 6 32 point Type Transistor PNP Output Unit 2 49 2 10 7 64 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit 2 51 2 10 8 64 point Type Transistor PNP Output Unit 2 53 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications 0 ccc eee 2 55 2 11 1 32 point Type DC Input 382 point Type Transistor NPN OUMU AIG saa eins ack dire Siena hom eae ee Sn S tog are eae wee a 2 55 2 11 2 32 point Type DC Input 82 point Type Transistor PNP OUIOUTIINE sereas ga adaid eet ed ddead abet aera dye macaw Rae EA 2 58 2 11 3 32 point Type DC Input with On Pulse Catch Input Function 32 point Type Transistor Output NPN Unit 2 61 2 11 4 32 point Type DC Input with On Pulse Catch Input Function 32 point Type Transistor Output PNP Unit 2 64 2 11 5 On Pulse Catch Input Function anaana 0c eee 2 67 Chapter 3 I O Allocation 3 1 Fundamentals of I O Allocation 0 0 ccc cee 3 3 3 1 1 I O Allocation and Registering 0 cece eee eee ees 3 3 3 1 1 1 Types of I O Allocation Methods 3 3 3 1 1 2 Precautions Regarding Regist
275. t Note 4 FP Memory Loader Ver 2 1 or later version is necessary to use the FP2SH CPU 32k type When using FP2SH CPU 120k type only the 1st program and comments can be transferred Note Precautions concerning version upgrade e Incase of using FPWIN GR Ver 1 please purchase upgrade model FPWIN GR Ver 2 e FPWIN GR Ver 2 0 can be upgraded to Ver 2 1 or later free of charge at our web site e FPWIN Pro Ver 6 0 can be upgraded to Ver 6 1 or later free of charge at our web site http industrial panasonic com ac e dl_center software Xvi Chapter 1 Overview Overview FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 1 System Configuration 1 1 System Configuration 1 1 1 Basic Configuration by Number of Slots The building block scheme allows you to combine units as desired Five types of backplanes and Two types of backplanes H types are available for the FP2 FP2SH A variety of input output units can be installed as desired on the back plane Although most of the I O units and intelligent units can be combined freely in the layout you should check the following three points when selecting your units Restrictions on unit types section 1 2 2 1 Limitations on the internal current consumption section 1 2 2 2 Limitations on the number of modules of the backplane page 1 4 FP2 backplane
276. t RAM operation causes the Autoexec spg file stored in the IC memory card to be sent to the in ternal RAM When the mode is switched to RUN operation begins in accordance with the contents of that file Before the ROM RAM menu is executed any contents loaded with the tool become the contents of the internal RAM FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 6 8 2 Creating Files for Automatically Run Programs In order to automatically execute programs stored on the card when the power supply is turned on the following procedure must be used to convert the programs to programs that will run automatically Procedure 1 On the FPWIN GR tool software menu select the follow ing Tool gt IC Card Service gt Auto Run File Conversion 2 Select the pagam to D re up automatically a r E ee VP ead e g Crom 3 Select the destination to which the program is to be stored after it is converted Look in a Documents c E Files of type Folder Cancel 4 An auto run file is created and a confirmation message displayed AN Auto Fiun file AU TOEXEC SPG was created in the specified folder The auto run file created in this procedure can be read using the various IC card menus The following shows the screen displayed for Copy File to IC Card Flash Memory Select File Copy File gt iC Card
277. t available Address DT9148 Note1 DT9149 Note1 DT9150 Note1 DT9151 Note1 DT9152 Note1 DT9153 Note1 DT9154 Note1 DT9155 Note1 DT9156 Note1 DT9157 Note1 DT9158 Note1 DT9159 Note1 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH DT90148 DT90149 DT90150 MEWNET W P PC PLC link status PC PLC link 1 W P Note2 3 MEWNET T90156 W P D DT90157 PC PLC link status PC PLC link 0 W P Note2 3 MEWNET T90158 W P PC PLC Descriptions The number of times the receiving operation is performed counted using ring counter The current interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5 ms The minimum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5 ms The maximum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5 ms The number of times the sending operation is performed counted using ring counter The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5 ms The minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5 ms The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5 ms N A Area used for measurement of receiving interval Area used for measurement of sending interval Area used for measurement of receiving interval Area used for measurement of sending interval link status PC PLC DT90159 link 1
278. t issued and the ERROR LED does not light BATT LED does not light Link relay L INITIALIZE position setting at Le f Link data switch is set to on error position register LD P Error alarm relay Default Descriptions value Sequence program area 4 ox FP2 16K 2 to 16K words Capecity Seung words FP2 32K 2 to 32K words Machine language tion of program area capacity owo FP2 16K 0 to 14K words user setting FP2 32K 0 to 30K words memory Available PLC FP2 sting on a panoia FP2 16K 0 to 14K words Available PLC FP2 FP2 ee 0 to 30K words Internal relay Cieaed Cleared When the initialize test R switch is set to Timers while in the PROG Counters T Cleared mode you can specify C SV EV the type of memory to Data register CI d be cleared DT SS Not cleared When the initialize test File register while in the PROG FL Cleared mode you can specify Index the type of memory to register I be not cleared Differential type Conventional Holds preceded result instructions setting Conven inthe MC and MCE instruction set between MC and MCE tional New Disregards preceded result in instructions the MC and MCE instruction set TM instruction operation setting Conven Conventional Scan synchronous Available PLC FP2SH tional New Scan asynchronous FP10SH Enabled Checks for overflow of the index modifier area and performs Index modifier check Eaabiad normal processing setting Disabled Perf
279. t of the PLC is not turned off or if the LED of the limit switch is kept on because of the leakage current the connection of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Using 16 point type DC input unit FP2 X16D2 Off voltage 2 5V Input impedance 3kQ LED equipped limit switch Bleeder resistor Internal circuit r Internal resistor of limit switch kQ R Bleeder resistor kQ The off voltage of the input is 2 5V therefore when the power supply voltage is 24V select R so that 24 2 5 the current will be greater than eee 7 5 The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is R kQ2 3 xX 1 2 5 Power supply voltage R The wattage W of the resistor is W In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 3 Wiring Input and Output 4 3 2 Output Wiring Before the wiring carefully confirm the specifications for the units to be wired Specifi cally limitations on the ambient temperature number of points that can be on simultaneously and load current will differ for different units Use a protection circuit when connecting inductive loads and capacitive loads Connection of Inductive Loads When connecting an inductive load a protective circuit should be connected in parallel with the load When connecting the DC type inductive loads and relay type output unit be sure to con nect a diode for pr
280. t of the output unit Refer to the manual of the particular unit you are using to confirm the current consumed at 24V by the S LINK units Positioning units High speed counter units and Pulse I O units 1 14 FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 3 Expansion Function 1 3 Expansion Function 1 3 1 Computer Link 1 1 communication The FP2 CPU can be directly connected to a computer through the COM RS232C port ao So ay SSR EO SL ol Se eh ee rr i 1 ort Commercially available RS232C cable Two core cable RS485 VCTFO 75 x 2C 1 N communication A C NET adapter can be used to enable communication for a number of programmable controllers PC C NET adapter 7 n AFP8536 AFP8532 i Commercially available RS232C cable ae Pest re FP2 FP2SH euuue a a a a a a a a A maximum of 32 stations can be connected Since a COM RS232C port and TOOL RS232C port comes standard on the CPU for the FP2 FP2SH direct communication with the computer can be achieved without the addition of any intelligent units Using a host computer program the relay conditions and register contents of the CPU can be read and written With communications from a host computer communication programs are unnecessary on the CPU side 1 15 Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 3 Expansion Function Table of specifications 1 1 communication 1 N communication Communication
281. t units one word Link data register Note 1 8 448 words LDO to LD8447 Timer Counter set value area Note 1 Data memory for storing a tar 1 024 words 3 072 words get value of a timer and an ini SVO to SV1023 SVO to tial value of a counter Stores V3071 by timer counter number Timer Counter elapsed value area Note 1 and Note 3 1 024 words 3 072 words EVO to EV1023 EVO to EV3071 Data memory for storing the elapsed value during opera tion of a timer counter Stores by timer counter number File register Notes 1 and 3 Data memory used in pro gram Data is handled in 16 bit units one word FP2 16 K FP2 C2L 0 to 14 333 words 32 765 words FLO to FL14332 FP2 C2 FP2 32 K FP2 C2P when expanded 0 to 30 717 words FLO to FL30716 FP2 C3P 32 765 words x 3 banks 512 words DT90000 to DT90511 Special data register Data memory for storing spe 256 words cific data Various settings DT90000 to and error codes are stored DT90255 Index register Register can be used as an address of memory area and constants modifier 14 words l0 to ID 14 words x 16 banks IO to ID next page 10 11 Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants tem FP2 FP2SH Control Master control relay points 256 points instruction MCR pomi Number of labels JP and Total 256 points LOOP Number of step ladder 1 000 steps
282. tation and recover the slave condition Selection of operation status using system register28 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 The power supply for the expansion unit was turned on after the control unit Turn on the power supply for the expansion A unit at the same time or before the control unit is turned on The voltage of the backup battery lowered or the backup battery of control unit is not installed Check the installation of the backup battery and then replace battery if necessary By setting the system register 4 you can disregard this self diagnostic error gt AJAJAJA 11 91 E57 11 92 Opera tion status MEWNET F terminal Conti station nues error MEWNET F I O update Conti synchro nues nous error Multi CPU I O regis tration Conti error nues CPU2 s only IC memory card back Conti up battery nues error IC memory card back Cont up battery inues error Incompati ble IC Cont memory inues card error No unit for the Conti configu nues ration Self diagnostic Stop error set by F148 ERR P148 Conti PERR nues instruction Description and steps to take Terminal station setting was not properly performed Check stations at both ends of the communication path and set them in the terminal station using the dip switches Set the INITIALIZE TEST selecto1inmjvbgycfrde892 r to the INITIALIZE position whil
283. th the unit for installation 6 Connector for power supply unit 7 Connector for expansion cable for more details regarding the cable connecting refer to section 4 1 3 Board number setting switch is used to set a bord number for the expansion backplane I O numbers are assigned according to the board number set the board numbers in increasing order 1 2 and 3 from the board close to the basic backplane Do not set 4 or higher numbers as proper operation cannot be guaranteed Type of Backplane Re Neti ome aues Panam ber elses 10 module type Expansion system only FP2 BP10EH Approx 470g rae Note The color of letters on the printed board is yellow to make easier to distinguish the FP2 backplane H type from the FP2 backplane FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable 2 1 4 Expansion Cable Length FP2 EC Approx 200 9 FP2 EC2 Approx 400 g Note With the backplalne H type the total cable length can be arranged within 3 2 m Ferrite core eae Note Connect the connector on the side of the ferrite core to the CPU backplane Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 2 FP2CPU 2 2 FP2CPU 2 2 1 Standard Type CPU FP2 C1 Parts Terminology and Functions Q Status indicator LEDs page 2 9 display the operating condition and error statuses 2 Initialize test switch page 2 9 is used to clear the errors initializes the operation memory and set the test operat
284. the IC memory card begins and the List of File Copy Results is displayed Method 2 Directly write the program that is made by the FPWIN GR to the IC memory card For the SRAM type IC memory card Procedure 1 Booting the Download Program to IC Card function On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Download Program to IC Card Download Program to IC Card 7 15 IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 3 For Use as Program Memory 2 Setting the file information Enter the File Name name of the file to which the pro gram is to be written the Title and the Author name of the person creating the file The file name must be within 8 characters Programs can be written even if the Title and the Au thor are not specified Check to make sure the necessary items have been en tered and click on the Execute button Writing of the program to the IC memory card begins i Note To have the program being sent executed automatically select Auto Run File Without Comment for the Type of File Infor mation 7 16 FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 3 For Use as Program Memory Method 3 Write a program on the RAM of the CPU into the IC memory card For the SRAM type IC memory card PSAl Pacer 9 vier 2 xpene Ese o Sis ss Peet a By performing the following procedures the data on the RAM of the CPU is written
285. the PROG mode 11 25 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name _ Description _ R9080 R9081 R9082 R9083 R9084 R9085 R9086 MEWNET W P R9087 PC link transmission assurance relay R9088 for PC link 1 W P Note R9089 R908A R908B R908C R908D R908E R908F Turns on when unit No 1 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 2 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 3 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 4 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 5 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 6 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 7 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 8 is co
286. the mode selector to start and stop the operation For test operations set the initial ize test switch to TEST position Selector position Operation mode RUN upward This sets the RUN mode The program is executed and operation begins REMOTE This enables operation to be started and stopped from a programming tool At the center stage where the selector is changed when switching from the PROG to the RE MOTE mode the system remains in the PROG mode and when switching from the RUN to the REMOTE mode it remains in the RUN mode PROG downward This sets the PROG mode In this mode programming can be done using tools the test operation mode can be accessed and the operation memory can be initialized using the Initialize tset switch Operation Condition Switches SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 Switch position Baud rate for tool port System register setting 9 600bps Default value 19 200bps Program memory selection Internal RAM Optional memory ROM Program memory protection Write enabled Write protected Nowed A CS 2 10 FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 2 FP2CPU COM Port RS232C Pin alignment Signal name Saa direction Destination Field device 2 Senddae fso a Received data ro a Requestto send aways on RS 5 Cleartosena fes 7 sianaigroundtemint so oo C Equipment ready always on ee O A es ss eee ee ee Sa eee rae Note The serial data communication control instructio
287. tic function detects the occurrence of an abnormality in the system The self diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection I O abnormal detection and other devices When a self diagnostic error occurs The ERROR turns on or flashes The operation of the control unit CPU unit might stop depending on the content of error and the system register setting The error codes will be stored in the special data register DI9000 DT90000 In the case of operation error the error address will be stored in the DT9017 DT90017 and DT9018 DT90018 Clearing the self diagnostic error At the STATUS DISPLAY execute the error clear Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared You can use the initialize test switch to clear an error However this will also clear the contents of operation memory Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG mode However the contents of operation memory not stored with the hold type data will also be cleared The error can also be cleared depending on the self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Steps to take for self diagnostic error The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents For more details use the error code obtained above and consult the table of self diagnostic error codes E MEWTOCOL COM Transmission Errors These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response when commun
288. tion memory and does not use the hold type memory operation is possible without a battery FP2 C2P or FP2 C8P and IC memory card with the program written to it When the power supply is turned on the program in the IC memory card is sent to the RAM and the program in the RAM is executed Hold type data of operation memory If the program is in the operation memory and does not use the hold type memory operation is possible without a battery With AlC52000 periodic charg ing or replacement is necessary Charging is done by inserting it in the CPU With AFP2209 the replacement of memory backup battery is necessary 6 13 FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 5 FP2SH Operation 6 5 2 Retaining Data If the Power Fails Operation Memory Backup Of the internal relays data registers and other operation memories data specified as hold type data in the system registers is backed up by the backup battery Setting the Alarm Battery Error Normally if a problem occurs with the backup battery the BATT and ERROR LEDs on the front panel of the CPU light to warn of a battery error During ROM operation and when no operation memory backup is required the alarm battery error can be set to off If this setting is entered the BATT and ERROR LEDs do not light Method The FPWIN GR tool software is used Procedure 1 On the Option menu select PLC Configuration
289. to the right s i le N ee eo C i Ct 0 i i U TI oO O o Left shift of one D1 Shifts the one word of the areas by word 16 bit PWSHL D2 D1 and D2 to the left Right shift of one WBSR D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by hexadecimal digit 4 PWBSR D2 D1 and D2 to the right bit F113 Left shift of one WBSL D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by P113 hexadecimal digit 4 PWBSL D2 D1 and D2 to the left 2 bit O Available gt lt Not available Not available partially 11 67 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Boolean Description l bee TEI EI P115 PFIFT defined in the buffer ame eel aaa Data read from The oldest data beginning from S bela al A ao SE and stored in D P117 FIFO buffer PFIFW starting from D ee eS Basic function instructions UP DOWN counter UDC S D Counts up or down from the value preset in S and stores the elapsed value in D i F119 Left right shift LRSR D1 Shifts one bit to the left or right with register D2 the area between D1 and D2 as 5 O the register Data rotate instructions Data rotate instructions O OS rer EEE P120 rotate PROR the right P121 rotate PROL the left 16 bit data right RCR D n Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area rotate with carry PRCR consisting of D plus the carry flag flag R9009 data R9009 data to the right 16 bit
290. to the standard type CPU on the right side Terminal Terminal number number A7 ZEEE i NI gt O Correspondence table of 64 point type input unit When a 64 point type input unit is next to the standard type CPU on the right side Examples for the CN1 group Examples for the CN2 group Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal number number number number number number Ai Bi X28 A2 B2 X29 AS X2A AG X2B AS B5 X2e A6 B6 X20 A8 LXer Ao A10 AN A12 AE A4 A5 A16 0j gt O PO O X lt 2 lt A7 gt lt NI O wc B0 e X38 Bz x Ba a Ba pe X3C X3D e7 pe me X3F mooo B9 em je 0 e X X X X X X Z O Z QO O z i NI O 0 A O N gt O i FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units Correspondence table of 32 point type output unit When a 32 point type output unit is next to the standard type CPU on the right side Terminal Output Terminal Output Es A a B2 J9 Ls YB A7 N OI 0I A OINI O Correspondence table of 64 point type output unit When a 64 point type output unit is next to the standard type CPU on the right side Examples for the CN1 group Examples for the CN2 group Terminal Output Terminal Output Terminal Output Terminal Output number number number number number number number number Y2C iS NO N 00 m o Y Y Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 4 Wir
291. tored in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first Scaling linearization on a real number data table is performed and the output Y to an input value X is calculated N NO i x x x kd This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used FP2SH FP10SH FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Ope rr Boolean p Description rand Time series processing instruction PID processing S PID processing is performed depending on the control value mode and parameter specified by S to S 2 and S 4 to S 10 and the result is stored in the S 3 Easy PID S1 Temperature control PID can be S2 easily performed using the image S3 S4 of a temperature controller Compare instructions F373 16 bit data DTR S D If the data in the 16 bit area P373 revision PDTR specified by S has changed detection since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D is used to store the data of the previous execution F374 32 bit data DDTR S D If the data in the 32 bit area P374 revision PDDTR specified by S 1 S has changed detection since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D 1 D is used to store the data of the previous execution Index register bank processing instructions F410 Setting the SETB n Index register 10 to ID bank P410 index register PSETB number change o
292. tput FP2 XY64D7T 32 point type DC input 32 point FP2 XY64D2P 32X 32Y 1 type transistor PNP output FP2 XY64D7P 6 mw next page I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 1 Fundamentals of I O Allocation Part number Occupied Number of I O point occupied slot Intelligent Analog input unit FP2 AD8VI FP2 AD8X FP2 RTD 128SX uni Analog output unit FP2 DA4 64SY High speed counter unit Pulse I O unit Positioning unit 2 axis type Positioning unit 4 axis type Positioning unit Multifunction type 2 axis type Positioning unit Multifunction type 4 axis type Positioning unit RTEX 2 axis type Positioning unit RTEX 4 axis type Positioning unit RTEX 8 axis type Positioning Unit Interpolation type 2 axis type Positioning Unit Interpolation type 4 axis type Multi communication unit Serial data unit C C U S LINK unit ET LAN unit MEWNET VE Link unit Notes FP2 HSCT FP2 HSCP FP2 PXYT FP2 PXYP FP2 PP2 FP2 PP4 PS wae Pa Transistor output type 32SX 32SY Transistor output type 64SX 64SY FP2 PN2AN 128SX 128SY Ea Transistor output type 32SX 32SY 1 Transistor output type 64SX 64SY 1 FP2 CCU 16SE OSE 1 Note 3 Note 1 16SE OSE 1 Note 3 7 32SX 32SY OSE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FP2 PN4AN FP2 PN8AN FP2 SL2 FP2 MW FP2 ET1 FP2 VE 32SX 32SY OSE 16SE OSE 1 Note 3 FP2 FNS PROFIBUS Device Net CAN open FP2 DPV1 M_ 16
293. tput reaches High speed the target value of S 1 S counter control Pulse output control Target value much HC1R n S D Turns output Yn off when the off with channel elapsed value of the high speed specification counter or pulse output reaches High speed the target value of S 1 S counter control Pulse output control Pulse output JOG S n Positioning pulses are output positioning type from the specified channel in 5 n AAAA 0 1 Trapezoidal accordance with the contents of control the data table that starts with S Pulse output JOG PLSH S n Pulse strings are output from the operation 0 and 1 specified output in accordance 5 AAAA with the contents of the data table that starts with S PWM output with N channel 5 PWMH S PWM output is output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S 11 71 FP2SH FP10SH z e i F174 Pulse output Outputs the pulses from the Selectable data specified channel according to table control peration the data table specified by S Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc Performs the home return F176 Pulse output SPCH Circular interpolation according to the specified data F177 Pulse output Home return table F178 Input pulse PLS M S1 S2 D Measures the number of pulses measurement and cycle
294. ttery voltage can be confirmed with special internal relays R9005 and R9006 the ERROR LED and BATT LED Be sure to replace new battery within a week IC memory card Battery lifetime Ambient temperature of 25 C FP2SH AFP2209 Approx 3 years or more The battery voltage of IC card is detected only once when the CPU unit is powered on An error will not be determined if the battery is replaced during power on If the battery voltage has dropped the ERROR LED lights R9101 or R9102 on and error code K55 or K54 is stored in special data register DT90000 Error codes can be confirmed using programming tools Backup battery PLC Type FP2 CPU unit AFC8801 Lithium battery CR2450 or equivalent FP2SH CPU unit AFP8801 Common to FP3 and FP10SH IC memory card AFP2806 BR 1225A B Maintenance FP2 FP2SH 9 1 Replacement of Spare Parts eS Notes During RAM operation save the program in the CPU onto disk using programming tool software FPWIN GR Never throw batteries into a fire disassemble or charge the battery in order to prevent accidents such as bursting fire or heat generation Replacement Method of Backup Battery Preparation Leave the unit on for more than 30 minutes then turn the power off and remove the CPU It is recommended to save the programs and data within the CPU in a PC in case that it requires time for the replacement rae Note After turning the power off be sure to finish replacin
295. tting the Battery Error Warnings 6 4 FPZ RAN Operati sn22 vende hee vies eevee haha e eee eee dee we 6 5 6 2 1 RAM Operation Method 0 ccc eens 6 5 6 2 2 Precautions When Operating the RAM 000000 6 5 FPZROM OPCIANON recuse tt eeand dened sea te EEE Seen es 6 6 6 3 1 ROM Operation Method nannan aaaea 6 6 6 3 2 Verifying the ROM Contents in RAM Operation 6 7 Wilting ic RON lt axt cu te tprenete ture etree rete eae ve shee ene Eh 6 8 6 4 1 Writing to EPROM Using Programming Tool Software 6 8 6 4 2 Writing to EPROM via FROM 0 00 eae 6 10 FP2SA OpEralO sarasta nema a a a e ytaeaabes 6 13 6 5 1 Comparison of RAM ROM and IC Memory Card Operation 6 13 6 5 2 Retaining Data If the Power Fails 000 cue 6 14 653 COMMENt FUNCION 1 ontccciedasceavetatcaatedadeucesaica ss 6 16 FP2ZSH RAM ODGraUOn 6 4exciee suet oust ie ede eueh eevee coer wees 6 17 6 6 1 RAM Operation Method 0c cece eee eee eee 6 17 6 6 2 Precautions When Operating the RAM 005 6 18 FP2SM ROM OPCaANON eroris de enews bee ng du eee eh te ea Aa 6 19 FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures 6 8 6 7 1 ROM Operation Function 0 0c cece eens 6 19 6 7 2 ROM Operation Method nananana anaana 6 20 6 7 3 Precautions When Operating the ROM 6 21 6 7 4 Checking the ROM Contents While Using
296. type CPU and 2 module type power supply unit 5 slots free slots free Number of slots where units can be installed FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 1 System Configuration FP2 backplane H type 11 module type 1 module type CPU and 1 module type power supply unit 2 module type CPU and 1 module type power supply unit 1 module type 8 slots free CPU and 2 module type pAb Sh iS Hle ee at power supply unit A maximum of eight I O units including the unit built in the CPU 2 module type 7 slots free can be controlled per backplane Even if further I O units are CPU and ae ete ee eee installed they are not recognized 2 module type bo afl ee et Note When using the CPU unit with S LINK seven slots are free power supply l T however the units actually usable are only six Refer to Chapter 3 unit I O Allocation 1 1 2 Expansion of Backplane FP2 backplane sie backplane Expansion backplane Expansion cable Only one backplane can be added on for expansion Expansion is simply connecting a new backplane with a special expansion cable Any backplane other than a 5 module type can be used for expansion eS Notes A 5 module type backplane cannot be expand
297. type relay output unit 2 41 16 point type DC input unit 2 33 16 point type relay output unit 2 39 16 point type transistor NPN output unit 2 43 16 point type transistor PNP output unit 2 45 60k step standard type CPU FP2 C2 2 19 64 point type DC input unit 2 37 64 point type transistor NPN output unit 2 51 64 point type transistor PNP output unit 2 53 Spare parts 9 3 Specifications 10 3 SRAM 7 3 Standard type CPU FP2 C1 2 8 Start up sequence 4 36 Static electricity viii Status indicator LEDs 2 9 8 3 System configuration 1 3 7 Terminal 4 24 Terminal block 4 34 32k step standard type CPU FP2 C2L 2 19 32 point type transistor PNP output unit 2 49 32 point type DC input unit 2 35 32 point type DC input with on pulse catch input function 32 point type transistor output NPN unit 2 61 32 point type DC input with on pulse catch input function 32 point type transistor output PNP unit 2 64 32 point type DC input 32 point type transistor NPN output unit 2 55 32 point type DC input 32 point type transistor PNP output unit 2 58 Index FP2 FP2SH 32 point type transistor NPN output unit 2 47 Troubleshooting 8 5 2 module type 1 4 W Watchdog timer 4 37 Weight 10 4 Wiring the connector type units 4 23 Wiring the terminal block type units 4 34 Writing the program 7 13 Writing to ROM
298. ue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function A Available 11 89 11 90 Opera tion status System watching dog timer error Slave station connecting Siet time error for MEWNET F system Operation error Description and steps to take Scan time required for program execution exceeds the setting of the system watching dog timer Check the program and modify it so that the program can execute a scan within the specified time Selection of operation status using system register24 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 The time required for slave station connection exceeds the setting of the system register 35 Selection of operation status using system register25 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Operation became impossible when a high level instruction was executed Selection of operation status using system register26 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO The address of operation error can be confirmed in either special data registers DT9017 and DT9018 or DT90017 and DT90018 It varies according to the model to be used DT9017 DT9018 FP e FPO FPOR FPO mode DT90017 DT90018 FP FP X FPOR FPOR mode FP2 FR2SH FP10SH Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function A Availab
299. unit is not installed Tightening torque 0 9 to 1 1 N m Procedure 1 Lightly secure the upper part of the backplane using the mounting holes 2 Align the mounting holes for the lower part and secure Tighten the upper screws 4 Make sure that backplane is securely attached p M4 screw FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 1 Installation Installation to a DIN Rail Procedure 1 Attach the railing on the rear of the backplane to the DIN rail 2 Push the backplane in the direction of the arrow as il lustrated below so that it attaches securely NN _ Removal from a DIN Rail Procedure 1 Place the tip of a flat headed screwdriver into the slot for the DIN rail attachment lever 2 Pull out the DIN rail attachment lever with the flat headed screwdriver and remove the backplane from the DIN rail 4 Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 1 Installation 4 1 2 2 Units Be sure to install the unit according to the following procedures Notes Do not remove the dust proofing label that is attached to the upper portion of the unit until the unit is completely installed and the wiring is completed However be sure to remove the dust proofing label prior to operation section 4 3 3 Complete the backup battery installation and operation condi tion switches setting prior to installing the CPU sections 2 2 1 and 4 1 4 1 FP2 backplane With the CPU b
300. unit is shared with them If the LED on the power supply unit turn on at this moment prepare another power sup ply for other devices Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting FP2 FP2SH 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 4 If Outputting Does Not Occur as Desired Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side Check of output condition 1 Output indicator LEDs are on Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the loads Procedure 2 Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads If the power is properly supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the load Check the load again If the power is not supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the output section Please contact your dealer Check of output condition 2 Output indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Monitor the output condition using a programming tool If the output monitored is turned on there is probably a duplicated output error Procedure 2 Forcing on the output using forcing I O function If the output indicator LED is turned on go to input condition check If the output indicator LED remains off there is probably an abnormality in the output unit Please contact your dealer Check of input condition 1 Input indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the input devices Procedure 2 Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals If the power is properly supplied to t
301. up battery 9 3 Limitations on current consumption 1 12 M Memory areas 10 10 Menus related to tool software 7 25 Mode selector 2 10 MODEM 1 17 Momentary power failures 4 37 Mounting hole dimensions 4 6 Mounting method 4 6 O Occupied I O points 3 5 On pulse catch input function 2 67 Operating environment viii Operation condition switches 2 10 2 21 Output unit 2 31 Output units specifications 2 39 Output wiring 4 21 P Password 8 10 Performance specifications 10 5 10 8 2 FP2 FP2SH Index Pin layout 2 14 2 34 2 36 2 38 2 40 2 42 2 44 2 46 2 48 2 50 2 52 2 54 2 57 2 60 2 63 2 66 Power outages 6 4 Power supply sequence ix Power supply system 4 16 Power supply unit 2 28 Power supply voltage 4 15 Pressure connection terminal 4 15 Preventive maintenance 9 8 Program memory 7 13 Program memory field 7 6 Programming tool 1 19 4 5 Programming tool software 5 5 5 6 Protect error message 8 10 R RAM operation 6 3 6 5 6 13 Reading the program 7 18 Relays 10 10 Removable terminal block 9 7 Restrictions on unit types 1 10 ROM 1 21 2 15 2 22 ROM operation 6 3 6 13 RT 2 relay terminal 4 31 S Safety measures 4 36 Self diagnostic function 8 3 Setting the alarm battery error 6 14 Setting the battery error warnings 6 4 6 point
302. valent of 16 points 16E is allocated In the case of automatic allocation O numbers are assigned based on the installed I O units each time the power is turned on rae Note With automatic allocation the contents of allocation are not reg istered to the system register 3 4 1 1 Example of Automatic Allocation The I O numbers in the illustration are the allocated I O numbers using automatic alloca tion CPU backplane Slots that do not actually exist Backplane 7 module type backplane j Slot No PA Power supply unit 1 module OPS eS of Uy di CPU 1 module Pah ros I O units m 16 point type DC input unit 2 units 16 point type transistor output unit 3 units j i 1 ae ae oy nee ae ses 0 50 160 T YF YSE YaF isr A DC Esai unit etn opt nt unit 17 o sa va ve Eea 7 Her iaia Expansion backplane Backplane 9 module type Power supply unit 1 module I O units 16 point type relay output unit 6 units B I Ji J 64 point type DC input unit 1 unit Y160 Y170 Y180 Y190 Y200 Y210 x220 260 0 to to to 0 to Y16F Y17F Y18F Y19F Y20F Y21F X25F 26F 16 point type 64 point relay output unit type DC input unit 3 15 I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 4 Automatic Allocation
303. vel instructions F and P types are available The differences between the two types are explained as follows Instructions with the prefix F are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on Instructions with the prefix P are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected For the FPO FPOR FPX FP X the P type high level instructions are not available lean rand E Totoan mstructions St lee teres PEPE Eel ae Eee a ee ores GCCOOG P1 move PDMV i Epee RRE invert and PMV move 32 bit data DMV E EA move Reading of GETS The head word No of the specified slot is head word PGETS read sl A Al A No of the E E er el oe specified slot Bit data BIM The specified one bit i in S is transferred to S ee ee CCUG specified by n l FP2SH FP10SH FPO FP e FPX Hexadecimal DGT The specified one digit in S is transferred digit 4 bit to the UAN one digit in D The digit is z fofofolofo o data move spe D lt n Sa viapidaste data move PMV2 ne Ea S211 S219 D 3 D BOCCooo data move PDMV2 S241 ie Ne P10 PBKMV H D transferred to the area starting at D SJ The data of S is transferred to the all area P11 PCOPY between D1 and D2 ee ee ee ee ee ee Data read The data stored in the expansion memory Et p Peele from EEP of the EEP ROM specified by S1 and S2 7 X X X Xx ROM are transferred t
304. ver bank number F411 Changing the CHGB n Index register 10 to ID bank P411 index register PCHGB number change over with bank number remembering preceding bank number F412 Restoring the POPB Changes index register 10 to ID P412 index register PPOPB bank number back to the bank bank number before F411 CHGB P41 1 PCHGB instruction File register bank processing instructions F414 Setting the file SBFL n File register bank number change register bank pee 7 over number Changing the File register bank number change P415 file register PCBFL over with remembering preceding bank number bank number F416 Restoring the PBFL Changes file register bank P416 file register PPBFL number back to the bank before bank number F415 CBFL P415 PCBFL instruction QO Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FPO V2 1 or later only 2 This instruction is available for FP X V 1 20 or later and FP 32k type 3 This instruction is not available for FP10SH 11 81 11 4 Table of Error codes W Difference in ERROR display There are differences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model Display Display method FP1 FP M FP2 FP3 FP10SH ERROR Continually lit FP FPO FPOR FP X ERROR ALARM Flashes continually lit Screen display Continually lit W Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns ON When the ERROR on the control unit CPU unit
305. with the mode selector set to the PROG mode and then switch to the RUN mode Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized rae Note When stopping the operation of PLC also have the I O devices turned off after the PLC has stopped operating Alarm function When an alarm occurs the PLC turns off the output and stops operation Even while in this condition take the appropriate safety precautions outside of the PLC to ensure no malfunction or damage is transmitted to anywhere else in the system Grounding When installing the PLC next to devices that generate high voltages from switching such as inverters do not ground them together 4 36 FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 6 Safety Measures 4 6 2 Momentary Power Failures lf the duration of the power failure is less than 10 ms the PLC continues to operate If the duration of the power failure is 10 ms or longer the operation changes depending on the combination of units the power supply voltage and other factors If the PLC con tinues to operate the operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset The duration of the power failure is the time that the power to the power supply unit stops 4 6 3 Alarm Output The alarm output goes on when the watchdog timer is activated by a program error or an error in the hardware itself The alarm output terminal has two relay contacts N O normally open
306. xecuted on One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the F145 SEND P145 execution of the F145 SEND P145 PSEND and F146 PSEND and F146 RECV P146 PRECV instructions as follows RECV P146 PRECV off No abnormality detected instruction end flag on An abnormality detected communication error The error code is stored in DT90039 Monitors the mode of the COM port as on Serial data communication mode off Computer link mode F147 PR instruction Turns on while a F147 PR instruction is executed flag Turns off when a F147 PR instruction is not executed Turns on while editing a program in the RUN mode Monitors if FP3 FP10SH is in the F152 RMRD P152 F152 RMRD P152 PRMRD and F153 RMWT P153 PRMWT instructions PRMRD and F153 executable condition as follows RMWT P153 off None of the above mentioned instructions can be PRMWT instruction executed execution flag on One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed 11 21 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description _ _ Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the S ade a execution of the F152 RMRD P152 PRMRD and F153 PRMRD and F153 i i RMWT P153 PRMWT instructions as follows RMWT P153 l l off No abnormality detected PRMWT instruction l and fia on An abnormality detected access error g The error code is
307. y Field Fields of the IC memory card that are not formatted can be used as expanded memory field 1 Using the entire IC memory card as expansion memory when there is no DOS formatted field The Card capacity 1 word portion can be used The data of one word two bytes can be stored in one address As the following example calculation in 2MB area data of 1 048 575 words can be stored 2 x 1048576 bytes 2 1 1 048 575 words In the expanded memory field the addresses are numbered by word units and regardless of the size of the formatted area the starting address is numbered as 0 HO For example the addresses for 1MB 512k words area are from as HO to H7FFFE A d Example When 1MB of SRAM type IC memory card is designated as ex pansion memory Address H 0 Expanded memory field ave 524 287 words H7FFFE IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 4 For Use as Expansion Memory 2 Using the remaining DOS formatted field All of the remaining DOS formatted field can be used as expansion memory A e Example When 512 kB is set as the DOS formatted field in a 1 MB card 512 kB DOS Address 1 MB 0 512 kB Expanded memory field 262144 FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 5 Menus Related to Tool Software 7 5 Menus Related to Tool Software The FPWIN GR is equipped with menus that are used for management of the IC memory card Reading Programs and Data Stored on IC Memory Cards Up
308. y in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in the PA PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode 5 Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly I n the R906E R906F PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Note When the system registers 46 KO PC link O for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 1 for one with a larger slot No When the system registers 46 K1 PC link 1 for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 0 for one with a larger slot No 11 24 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Turns off when unit No 1 is in the PROG mode Turns off when unit No 2 is in the PROG mode Turns on when unit No 3 is in the RUN mode R9070 R9071 R9072 Turns off when unit No 3 is in the
309. ype can be set using the system registers 3 Can also be used as internal relays 4 Can also be used as data registers 5 Precision of calendar timer At 0 C 32 F less than 57 second error per month At 25 C 77 F less than 88 second error per month At 55 C 131 F less than 88 second error per month 6 For FP2 C2L and FP2 C2 the memory unit is required 10 9 Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants 10 2 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Relay External input X Turn on or off based on external input 2 048 points 8 192 points relay XO to X127F XO to X511F External output Y Externally outputs on or off state 2 048 points 8 192 points relay YO to Y127F YO to Y511F Internal relay R R Relay which turns on or off only within pro 4 048 points 14 192 points Note 1 gram RO to R252F RO to R886F Link relay L This relay is a shared relay used for 2 048 points 10 240 points Note 1 MEWNET link system LO to L127F LO to L639F Timer T If a TM instruction has timed out the con 1 024 points 3 072 points Notes 1 and 2 tact with the same number turns on TO to T999 TO to T2999 C1000 to C3000 to C Counter If a CT instruction has counted up the C1023 C3071 Notes 1 and 2 contact with the same number turn on Pulse relay P This relay is used to turn on only for one 1 024 points 2 048 points scan duration prog

FP2/FP2SH User`s Manual - Panasonic Electric Works

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents